6607 lines
281 KiB
Plaintext
6607 lines
281 KiB
Plaintext
# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
|
||
# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A.
|
||
# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package.
|
||
# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
|
||
#
|
||
# Translators:
|
||
# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019
|
||
# zpq001 <zpq001@live.com>, 2019
|
||
# bf2549c5415a9287249cba2b8a5823c7, 2019
|
||
# liAnGjiA <liangjia@qq.com>, 2019
|
||
# Connie Xiao <connie.xiao@elico-corp.com>, 2019
|
||
# Gary Wei <Gary.wei@elico-corp.com>, 2019
|
||
# Martin Trigaux, 2019
|
||
# mrshelly <mrshelly@hotmail.com>, 2019
|
||
# 敬雲 林 <chingyun@yuanchih-consult.com>, 2019
|
||
# ChinaMaker <liuct@chinamaker.net>, 2019
|
||
# Jeffery CHEN <jeffery9@gmail.com>, 2019
|
||
# fausthuang, 2019
|
||
# guohuadeng <guohuadeng@hotmail.com>, 2019
|
||
# inspur qiuguodong <qiuguodong@inspur.com>, 2019
|
||
#
|
||
#, fuzzy
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n"
|
||
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
|
||
"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n"
|
||
"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n"
|
||
"Last-Translator: inspur qiuguodong <qiuguodong@inspur.com>, 2019\n"
|
||
"Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n"
|
||
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
|
||
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
|
||
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
|
||
"Language: zh_CN\n"
|
||
"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory.rst:5
|
||
msgid "Inventory"
|
||
msgstr "库存"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr "条码"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Daily Operations"
|
||
msgstr "日常作业"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open"
|
||
" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory "
|
||
"Adjustments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet "
|
||
"*Commands for Inventory*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically "
|
||
"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to "
|
||
"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the "
|
||
"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set"
|
||
" the quantity."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if "
|
||
"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in "
|
||
"manually."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory "
|
||
"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful."
|
||
" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in"
|
||
" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the "
|
||
"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the "
|
||
"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and "
|
||
"interpretation of the encoded information."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug "
|
||
"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to "
|
||
"create your first rule."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* "
|
||
"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode "
|
||
"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of "
|
||
"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will"
|
||
" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should "
|
||
"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are"
|
||
" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the"
|
||
" “D” defines the decimals."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the "
|
||
"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be "
|
||
"applied."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48
|
||
msgid "Configure your Product"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50
|
||
msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to "
|
||
"identify the product;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case,"
|
||
" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know"
|
||
" which digit it should be in your case."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following "
|
||
"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when "
|
||
"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a"
|
||
" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be "
|
||
"computed."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74
|
||
msgid "Rule Types"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its "
|
||
"price, used in PoS;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied "
|
||
"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on "
|
||
"the product by scanning the discount barcode;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its "
|
||
"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with "
|
||
"loyalty program;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when "
|
||
"multi-location is activated;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages "
|
||
"are activated;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a "
|
||
"transfer;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from "
|
||
"the Mercury module;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and "
|
||
"Transfers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any "
|
||
"number of characters. Those characters can be any number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process to Transfers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Simple Transfers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to "
|
||
"*Operations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to "
|
||
"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to "
|
||
"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the "
|
||
"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the "
|
||
"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with "
|
||
"the stock moves."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add "
|
||
"additional steps for the different operation types."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Receipts"
|
||
msgstr "收货数量(在途)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to "
|
||
"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main "
|
||
"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode "
|
||
"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply "
|
||
"scan the next product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Delivery Orders"
|
||
msgstr "出库单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is "
|
||
"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start "
|
||
"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to "
|
||
"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to "
|
||
"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the "
|
||
"*Previous* and *Next* buttons."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you "
|
||
"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78
|
||
msgid "Internal Transfers"
|
||
msgstr "内部调拨"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to "
|
||
"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in "
|
||
"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct,"
|
||
" you don’t need to scan them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89
|
||
msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways "
|
||
"of working:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, "
|
||
"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the"
|
||
" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work "
|
||
"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the "
|
||
"lot/serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print"
|
||
" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode "
|
||
"sheet* from the home page of the app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document."
|
||
" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your "
|
||
"products to populate it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Setup"
|
||
msgstr "设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Set up your barcode scanner"
|
||
msgstr "设置你的条码扫描器"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Getting started with barcode scanning in Odoo is fairly easy. Yet, a good "
|
||
"user experience relies on an appropriate hardware setup. This guide will "
|
||
"help you through the task of choosing and configuring the barcode scanner."
|
||
msgstr "在Odoo中使用条码扫描相当容易。但是一个好的用户体验依赖与正确的硬件设置。该向导会帮你完成从条码枪的选择到设置。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:11
|
||
msgid "Find the barcode scanner that suits your needs"
|
||
msgstr "找到适用的条码扫描枪"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 3 recommended type of barcode scanners to work with the Odoo "
|
||
"**Inventory** and **Barcode Scanning** apps are the **USB scanner**, **the "
|
||
"bluetooth scanner** and the **mobile computer scanner**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"用来进行 **盘点** 和 **条码扫描** 推荐的3种不同的条码扫描应用是 **USB扫描枪** , **蓝牙扫描枪** 以及 **移动电脑扫描枪**"
|
||
" 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you scan products at a computer location, the **USB scanner** is the way "
|
||
"to go. Simply plug it in the computer to start scanning. Just make sure when"
|
||
" you buy it that the scanner is compatible with your keyboard layout or can "
|
||
"be configured to be so."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果在你电脑旁边对产品进行扫描, **USB扫描枪** "
|
||
"是不错的选择。只要插入电脑即可扫描。只要确保买到的扫描枪和你的键盘布局兼容或者可以配置成那样就可以。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **bluetooth scanner** can be paired with a smartphone or a tablet and is"
|
||
" a good choice if you want to be mobile but don't need a big investment. An "
|
||
"approach is to log in Odoo on you smartphone, pair the bluetooth scanner "
|
||
"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with the possibility to check "
|
||
"your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For heavy use, the **mobile computer scanner** is the handiest solution. It "
|
||
"consists of a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can "
|
||
"turn out to be a very productive solution, however you need to make sure "
|
||
"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothly. The most recent models using "
|
||
"Android + Google Chrome or Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile should do the "
|
||
"job. However, due to the variety of models and configurations on the market,"
|
||
" it is essential to test it first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:42
|
||
msgid "Configure your barcode scanner"
|
||
msgstr "配置条码扫描器"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Keyboard layout"
|
||
msgstr "键盘布局"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"An USB barcode scanner needs to be configured to use the same keyboard "
|
||
"layout as your operating system. Otherwise, your scanner won't translate "
|
||
"characters correctly (replacing a 'A' with a 'Q' for example). Most scanners"
|
||
" are configured by scanning the appropriate barcode in the user manual."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"一个USB扫描枪需要配置成和电脑键盘布局一样的操作系统, 不然, 你的扫描枪将不会直接的翻译(例如, "
|
||
"用'Q'代替'A')。大多数扫描枪通过扫描用户手册中的条码进行配置。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:57
|
||
msgid "Automatic carriage return"
|
||
msgstr "自动回车"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, Odoo has a 50 milliseconds delay between each successive scan "
|
||
"(it helps avoid accidental double scanning). If you want to suppress this "
|
||
"delay, you can configure your scanner to insert a carriage return at the end"
|
||
" of each barcode. This is usually the default configuration and can be "
|
||
"explicitly configured by scanning a specific barcode in the user manual ('CR"
|
||
" suffix ON', 'Apply Enter for suffix', etc.)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"默认的, Odoo在每次成功的扫描之间有50毫秒的延时(这样可以避免偶然的重复扫描)。如果你想禁用该延时, "
|
||
"你可以通过在每次扫描条码之后插入一个回车配置你的扫描枪。这通常是默认的配置并且能通过扫描用户手册中特定的条码进行配置('CR 后缀 "
|
||
"ON','申请输入后缀', 等等。)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost "
|
||
"switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly "
|
||
"attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to "
|
||
"work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with "
|
||
"the barcode scanner."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:14
|
||
msgid "Configuration"
|
||
msgstr "设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality "
|
||
"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the "
|
||
"feature, you can hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Set Product Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the "
|
||
"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly "
|
||
"at creation on the product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the "
|
||
"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46
|
||
msgid "Set Locations Barcodes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a "
|
||
"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the"
|
||
" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the "
|
||
"*Print* menu."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Barcode Formats"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without "
|
||
"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering "
|
||
"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your "
|
||
"own barcode format for internal use."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Warehouse Management"
|
||
msgstr "仓库管理"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?"
|
||
msgstr "如何取消交货单?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:6
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Overview"
|
||
msgstr "概览"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo gives you the possibility to cancel a delivery method whether it has "
|
||
"been validated to fast, it needs to be modified or for any other reason."
|
||
msgstr "不管是因为过快确认的原因, 还是需要被修正或者其余的原因, Odoo能让我们取消一个交货方式。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Some carriers are more flexible than others, so make sure to cancel your "
|
||
"delivery order as fast as possible if it needs to be done so you don't have "
|
||
"any bad surprise."
|
||
msgstr "有些货代会比其他货代更加灵活, 所以请在收到坏的消息之前确保在交货单取消掉。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:26
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:107
|
||
msgid "Sale process"
|
||
msgstr "销售过程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to the **Sales** module, click on **Sales** and then on **Sales Order**. "
|
||
"Then click on the sale order you want to cancel."
|
||
msgstr "进入 **销售** 模块, 点击 **销售** 然后点击 **销售订单** 。殿后点击你想要取消的销售订单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Click on the **Delivery** button, in the upper right corner of the sale "
|
||
"order."
|
||
msgstr "点击销售订单右上角的 **交货** 按钮。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, click on the **Additional info** tab and you will see that next to the "
|
||
"**Carrier Tracking Reference**, there is a **Cancel** button. Click on it to"
|
||
" cancel the delivery."
|
||
msgstr "现在, 点击 **更多信息** 页面然后你会看到紧挨着 **货代运单号** , 有一个 **取消** 按钮。点击该按钮就可以取消交货单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To make sure that your delivery is cancelled, check in the history, you will"
|
||
" receive the confirmation of the cancellation."
|
||
msgstr "确保交货单已经取消, 在历史记录中检查, 你会收到取消的确认。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How can I limit a delivery method to a certain number of countries?"
|
||
msgstr "如何把一种交货方式局限于特定的国家?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you can have different types of delivery methods, and you can "
|
||
"limit them to a certain number of countries."
|
||
msgstr "用Odoo, 你可以使用不同类型的交货方式, 并且可以限定特定的交货方式到特定的国家。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to the **Inventory** module, click on **Configuration** and then on "
|
||
"**Delivery Methods**."
|
||
msgstr "进入 **库存** 模块, 点击 **配置** 然后点击 **交货方式** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Select the delivery method that you want to change, or create a new one."
|
||
msgstr "选择你想变更的交货方式, 或者创建一个新的。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Destination** tab, choose the countries to which you want to apply "
|
||
"this delivery method."
|
||
msgstr "在 **目的地** 页面, 选择该种交货方式使用的国家。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:28
|
||
msgid "Now, that this is done, Let's see the result."
|
||
msgstr "现在已经完成, 我们来看看结果。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you go to the website, and you try to buy something, once you've entered "
|
||
"your details and you proceed to the payment, the website will propose you "
|
||
"only the delivery methods that apply to your shipping address."
|
||
msgstr "如果进入网站, 并且你需要购买, 一旦你完成详细的输入后并且完成了付款, 网站会提供根据交货地址上的交货方式。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This process doesn't work in backend. We assume that when you create a Sale "
|
||
"Order, you know which delivery method you can use since you created them."
|
||
msgstr "该进程不在后台运行。我们假设你创建了一个销售订单, 你就知道你能使用哪个已经创建的交货方式。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6
|
||
msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be "
|
||
"shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery "
|
||
"system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in "
|
||
"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in "
|
||
"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer."
|
||
" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in "
|
||
"stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are "
|
||
"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of "
|
||
"space in your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30
|
||
msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large"
|
||
" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a "
|
||
"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your "
|
||
"product is unique, then it makes sense!"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33
|
||
msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37
|
||
msgid "Make sure time is not against you."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more "
|
||
"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to"
|
||
" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44
|
||
msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If "
|
||
"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold "
|
||
"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our "
|
||
"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* <https://www.odoo.com/blog"
|
||
"/business-hacks-1/post/what-is-drop-shipping-and-how-to-use-it-250>`__."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52
|
||
msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to "
|
||
"*Configuration > Settings*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate "
|
||
"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field"
|
||
" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-"
|
||
"shipping."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you"
|
||
" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right"
|
||
" supplier, via the purchase tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76
|
||
msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor."
|
||
" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order "
|
||
"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-"
|
||
"Shipping*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request "
|
||
"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You "
|
||
"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and "
|
||
"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination"
|
||
" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your "
|
||
"own stock when you validate the dropship document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your "
|
||
"inventory dashboard."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to choose the right inventory flow to handle delivery orders?"
|
||
msgstr "如何选择正确的库存流程来处理交货订单?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Depending on factors such as the type of items you sell, the size of your "
|
||
"warehouse, the number of orders you register everyday... the way you handle "
|
||
"deliveries to your customers can vary a lot."
|
||
msgstr "依赖于销售产品的类型, 仓库的空间大小, 每天的单子数量……要发或给客户的方式可以有各种区别。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo allows you to handle shipping from your warehouse in 3 different ways:"
|
||
msgstr "Odoo能让我们以3种方式处理发货 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:12
|
||
msgid "**One step (shipping)**: Ship directly from stock"
|
||
msgstr " **一步(发货)**: 直接从库存发货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Two steps (pick + ship)**: Bring goods to output location before shipping"
|
||
msgstr " **二步(拣货+发货)**: 先把货物到出货区然后再发货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Three steps (pick + pack + ship)**: Make packages into a dedicated "
|
||
"location, then bring them to the output location for shipping"
|
||
msgstr " **三步(拣货+包装+发货)**: 先把货物发到一个专门位置进行包装, 然后发到出货位置进行发货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For companies having a rather small warehouse and that do not require high "
|
||
"stock of items or don't sell perishable items, a one step shipping is the "
|
||
"simplest solution, as it does not require a lot of configuration and allows "
|
||
"to handle orders very quickly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"有如果一个公司只是有一个小仓库并且不需要产品的高库存或者没有易腐产品。那么一步收发货是最简单且易用的方案, 这样无需大量的配置并且可以很快的处理单子。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Using inventory methods such as FIFO, LIFO and FEFO require to have at least"
|
||
" two steps to handle a shipment. The picking method will be determined by "
|
||
"the removal strategy, and the items removed will then be shipped to the "
|
||
"customer. This method is also interesting if you hold larger stocks and "
|
||
"especially when the items you stock are big in size."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"使用库存方式例如FIFO, LIFO, FEFO等, 需要在发货时至少需要两步。调拨方式会取决于出库策略, "
|
||
"并且移除的货物会发货给客户。如果你拥有一个大的库存特别是对于大尺寸的产品的库存这些就会显得很有意思。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The three steps system becomes useful in more specific situations, the main "
|
||
"one being for handling very large stocks. The items are transferred to a "
|
||
"packing area, where they will be assembled by area of destination, and then "
|
||
"set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在更多特定的情景中, 三步就会变得很有用, 最主要的一个就是处理大的库存。货物被转移到一个包装区域, 在那里根据最终目的地对这些货物进行分组打包, "
|
||
"然后发送到转运码头做最后的发货。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:40
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:53
|
||
msgid "One step flow"
|
||
msgstr "一步流程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:42
|
||
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`one_step`"
|
||
msgstr "参阅文档 :doc:`one_step` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Two steps flow"
|
||
msgstr "两步流程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:47
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:60
|
||
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`two_steps`"
|
||
msgstr "参阅文档 : : doc :`two_steps` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Three steps flow"
|
||
msgstr "三步流程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`three_steps`"
|
||
msgstr "参阅文档 :doc:`three_steps` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How can I change the label type?"
|
||
msgstr "如何变更标签类型?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you can choose among different types of labels for your delivery "
|
||
"orders. Follow the steps below and give an appropriate label type to your "
|
||
"delivery."
|
||
msgstr "在Odoo中, 你可以为交货单选择不同类型的标签。按照以下步骤给交货单选择合适的标签。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and click on **Delivery"
|
||
" methods**."
|
||
msgstr "在 **库存** 模块, 进入 **配置** 并点击 **交货方式** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Choose a delivery method and then click on **Edit**."
|
||
msgstr "选择一种发货方式并点击 **编辑** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Pricing** tab, under **Fedex label stock type**, you can choose one"
|
||
" of the label types available. The availability will vary depending on the "
|
||
"carrier."
|
||
msgstr "在 **定价** 页卡, 在 **Fedex 标签库存类型** 下面, 你能选择可用的标签类型。系统会根据货代的不同而显示不同的可用标签。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once this is done, you can see the result if you go to the Sales module and "
|
||
"you create a new sale order."
|
||
msgstr "一旦设置完成, 当你在销售模块中创建一张销售订单之后就能看到结果。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As you confirm the sale and validate the delivery with the carrier for which"
|
||
" you have modified the label type, The label will appear in your history."
|
||
msgstr "如果确认了销售订单并且确认了带有已经更改了标签类型的货代的交货单, 该标签就会显示在历史记录中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The default label type is paper letter, and if you choose the label type "
|
||
"bottom half for example, here is the difference :"
|
||
msgstr "默认的标签类型是纸信, 如果你选了标签类型只有一半, 就能看到不同 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default "
|
||
"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors "
|
||
"to the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming"
|
||
" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step "
|
||
"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit"
|
||
" the warehouse in question."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21
|
||
msgid "Create a Purchase Order"
|
||
msgstr "创建采购订单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and "
|
||
"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm "
|
||
"the *RfQ*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you "
|
||
"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the "
|
||
"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* "
|
||
"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click "
|
||
"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from "
|
||
"suppliers are considered as being always available."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* "
|
||
"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took "
|
||
"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Deliver Products in Packages"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different "
|
||
"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the "
|
||
"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Proceed to a Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will "
|
||
"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock "
|
||
"move lines."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery "
|
||
"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in "
|
||
"the package."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the "
|
||
"packages which were part of the delivery order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44
|
||
msgid "Use the Put in Pack button"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It "
|
||
"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as "
|
||
"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, "
|
||
"directly via the *Packages* button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How is the scheduled delivery date computed?"
|
||
msgstr "计划交货日期是如何运算的?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scheduled dates are computed in order to be able to plan deliveries, "
|
||
"receptions and so on. Depending on the habits of your company Odoo "
|
||
"automatically generates scheduled dates via the scheduler. The Odoo "
|
||
"scheduler computes everything per line, whether it's a manufacturing order, "
|
||
"a delivery order, a sale order, etc. The dates that are computed are "
|
||
"dependent on the different leads times configured in Odoo."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"计算计划日期是为了能够计划发货, 收货等等。依赖于你的公司的习惯Odoo会根据排程器自动生成计划日期。Odoo排程器每行的计算, 不管是生产订单, "
|
||
"发货单, 销售订单, 等等。计算出来的日期依赖于Odoo中设置号的不同的提前期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Configuring lead times"
|
||
msgstr "配置提前期"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Configuring **lead times** is a first essential move in order to compute "
|
||
"scheduled dates. Lead times are the delays (in term of delivery, "
|
||
"manufacturing, ...) promised to your different partners and/or clients."
|
||
msgstr "配置**备货时间**是计算日程的第一个关键步骤。备货时间是向不同伙伴和/或客户承诺的交货期、制造期等方面的延迟。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Configuration of the different lead times are made as follows:"
|
||
msgstr "按照以下配置不同的提前期 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28
|
||
msgid "At a product level"
|
||
msgstr "在产品层面"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:24
|
||
msgid "**Supplier lead time**:"
|
||
msgstr " **供应商提前期** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your purchased product. To "
|
||
"configure the supplier lead time select a product, and go in the "
|
||
"**Inventory** tab. You will have to add a vendor to your product in order to"
|
||
" select a supplier lead time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"是供应商需要讲采购的产品交货的时间。要, 配置供应商提前期需要选择一个产品, 并进入 **库存** "
|
||
"页签。你需要在产品上添加一个供应商用来选择一个供应商的提前期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendors and thus "
|
||
"different delivery lead times depending on the vendor."
|
||
msgstr "不要忘记可以添加不同的供应商以及不同供应商给出的不同的提前期"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once a vendor is selected, just open its form and fill its **Delivery lead "
|
||
"time**. In this case security days have no influence, the scheduled delivery"
|
||
" days will be equal to: **Date** of the purchase order + **Delivery Lead "
|
||
"Time**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"一旦供应商选定后, 只要打开供应商页面并填入 **交货提前期** 。在该状况下, 安全天数没有任何影响, 计划交货天数等于 :采购订单的 **日期** "
|
||
"+ **交货提前期** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:46
|
||
msgid "**Customer lead time**:"
|
||
msgstr " **客户提前期**: "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Customer lead time is the time needed to get your product from your store / "
|
||
"warehouse to your customer. It can be configured for any product. Simply "
|
||
"select a product, go into the sales tab and indicate your **Customer lead "
|
||
"time**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"客户提前期是货物从你的库存/仓库送到你的客户所需的时间。它可以在所有产品上进行配置。只要选定给一个产品, 进入销售页面并标出 **客户提前期** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:56
|
||
msgid "**Manufacturing lead time**:"
|
||
msgstr " **制造提前期**: "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"At the same page it is possible to configure the **Manufacturing Lead Time**"
|
||
" as well. Manufacturing lead time is the time needed to manufacture the "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr "在同一页面也可以配置 **生产提前期** , 生产提前期是制造产品所需的时间。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:63
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to tick the manufacturing box in inventory if you want to "
|
||
"create manufacturing routes."
|
||
msgstr "如果需要创建生产路径的话, 不要忘了在库存页面中勾选生产选相框。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74
|
||
msgid "At the company level"
|
||
msgstr "站在公司层面"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:69
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"At company level, it is possible to configure **security days** in order to "
|
||
"cope with eventual delays and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea "
|
||
"is to subtract **backup** days from the **computed scheduled date** in case "
|
||
"of delays."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在公司层面, 可以配置 **安全天数** 用来应付偶然的延期并能满足约定。该方法是从 **计算出来的计划日期** 减去 **后备** 天数用来应付延期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:74
|
||
msgid "**Sales Safety days**:"
|
||
msgstr " **销售安全天数** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Sales safety days are **back-up** days to ensure you will be able to deliver"
|
||
" your clients engagements in times. They are margins of errors for delivery "
|
||
"lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early wristwatch, in "
|
||
"order to arrive on time. The idea is to subtract the numbers of security "
|
||
"days from the calculation and thus to compute a scheduled date earlier than "
|
||
"the one you promised to your client. In that way you are sure to be able to "
|
||
"keep your commitment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"销售安全天数就是 **后备** 天数, "
|
||
"用来保证按照和客户约定的交期及时交货。它们是交货提前期的错误边际。安全天数和为了按时到达而把腕表的时间调早是同样的逻辑。该方法是从计算出来的理论交期减去安全天数并且计算一个比你承诺给客户的交期时间更早的日期。那样你就可以确保总是对客户满足你的承诺。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To set up your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General "
|
||
"settings` and click on **Configure your company data**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:90
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the menu is open, go in the configuration tab and indicate the number "
|
||
"of safety days."
|
||
msgstr "一旦菜单打开, 进入配置页面输入安全天数。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:93
|
||
msgid "**Purchase Safety days**:"
|
||
msgstr " **采购安全天数**: "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:95
|
||
msgid "Purchase days follow to the same logic than sales security days."
|
||
msgstr "采购的提前期和销售的提前安全天数逻辑一样。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:97
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"They are margins of error for vendor lead times. When the system generates "
|
||
"purchase orders for procuring products, they will be scheduled that many "
|
||
"days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays. Purchase lead time can "
|
||
"be found in the same menu as the sales safety days"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"对供应商提前期有一些错误边际。当系统生成采购订单对产品进行补货的时候, "
|
||
"它们可以被计划早一些天数用来应付供应商一些未知的不确定的延期。采购提前期可以在销售安全天数的同一个菜单下面看到。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:106
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Note that you can also configure a default Manufacturing lead time from "
|
||
"here."
|
||
msgstr "请注意, 你也可以在这里配置制造提前期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134
|
||
msgid "At route level"
|
||
msgstr "在路线层面"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The internal transfers that a product might do due to the movement of stocks"
|
||
" can also influence the computed date."
|
||
msgstr "产品的可能需要的内部调拨依赖于库存的移动并且也会影响到计算日期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:115
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in the **inventory** "
|
||
"app when creating a new push rule in a route."
|
||
msgstr "内部调拨的所需时间可以在 **库存** 模块的路径中的拉规则中定义。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:118
|
||
msgid "Go to the push rules section on a route form to set a delay."
|
||
msgstr "进入其中一个路径的推规则部分设置一个延迟。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:124
|
||
msgid "At sale order level:"
|
||
msgstr "在销售订单层面 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:126
|
||
msgid "**Requested date**:"
|
||
msgstr " **请求日期**: "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:128
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo offers the possibility to select a requested date by the client by "
|
||
"indicating the date in the other information tab of the sales order. If this"
|
||
" date is earlier than the theoreticaly computed date odoo will automatically"
|
||
" display a warning."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo也有可能让客户在销售订单的其他信息页面选定一个特定的需求日期。如果该日期比Odoo自动计算出来的理论日期短的话, 系统会弹出报警。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173
|
||
msgid "Example"
|
||
msgstr "例子"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on "
|
||
"order, and you promise to deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20)."
|
||
" In such a scenario, the scheduler may trigger the following events, based "
|
||
"on your configuration:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"例如, 你今天可以销售一辆汽车(一月1号), 该车是按订单补货方式, 并且你已经承诺会在20天内给客户交货(一月20号)。在该情景下, "
|
||
"排程器可能会根据你的配置触发以下事件 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:144
|
||
msgid "January 19: actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety days)"
|
||
msgstr "分录19 :实际计划发货(销售安全天数的1天)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:146
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 18: receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase days)"
|
||
msgstr "分录18 :从供应商收货(采购天数的1天)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:149
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 10: deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of supplier delivery "
|
||
"lead time)"
|
||
msgstr "分录10 :给供应商下单的最后期限(供应商交货提前期的9天)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:152
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since the team "
|
||
"need on average 2 days to find the right supplier and order."
|
||
msgstr "1月8 :触发一个给到采购团队的一个采购需求, 因为采购部分平均需要2天询价并下单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is "
|
||
"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed "
|
||
"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods "
|
||
"receipt process can become essential."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt"
|
||
" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default,"
|
||
" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can "
|
||
"allow having 3 steps."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then"
|
||
" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality "
|
||
"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of "
|
||
"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity "
|
||
"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23
|
||
msgid "Multi-Step Routes"
|
||
msgstr "多步路由"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, "
|
||
"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we "
|
||
"will chain the picking to the shipping."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to "
|
||
"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating "
|
||
"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38
|
||
msgid "Warehouse configuration"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*"
|
||
" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select "
|
||
"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as "
|
||
"*Outgoing Shipments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, "
|
||
"*Output* and *Packing Zone*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >"
|
||
" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit "
|
||
"save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56
|
||
msgid "Create a Sales Order"
|
||
msgstr "创建销售订单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. "
|
||
"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale "
|
||
"order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67
|
||
msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69
|
||
msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71
|
||
msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77
|
||
msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status,"
|
||
" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become "
|
||
"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the "
|
||
"inventory app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically "
|
||
"reserved and you can validate the picking document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be "
|
||
"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been "
|
||
"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly "
|
||
"validate it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be "
|
||
"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer "
|
||
"the products to the customer location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt"
|
||
" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the "
|
||
"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow "
|
||
"you to have 2 steps."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then "
|
||
"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in "
|
||
"your stock, they will not be available for further processing."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide"
|
||
" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will "
|
||
"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in"
|
||
" stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate "
|
||
"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate "
|
||
"*Storage Locations*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > "
|
||
"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, "
|
||
"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* "
|
||
"for *Incoming Shipments*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. "
|
||
"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select "
|
||
"Input* and update its name."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52
|
||
msgid "Create a purchase order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with"
|
||
" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is "
|
||
"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to "
|
||
"your purchase order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking "
|
||
"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another"
|
||
" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the "
|
||
"products to *Stock*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71
|
||
msgid "Process the picking and the delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while "
|
||
"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been "
|
||
"marked as *Done*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it "
|
||
"through the inventory dashboard."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, "
|
||
"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be "
|
||
"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received "
|
||
"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is "
|
||
"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them "
|
||
"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Incoming Shipments"
|
||
msgstr "入库"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to choose the right flow to handle receipts?"
|
||
msgstr "如何选择正确的步骤来处理收货?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Depending on factors such as the type of items you receive, the size of your"
|
||
" warehouse, the number of receipt you register everyday... the way you "
|
||
"handle receipts to your customers can vary a lot."
|
||
msgstr "取决于因子例如收到货物的类型, 仓库的空间大小, 每天的收货单数……处理收货和发货的方式也会因此存在差异。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo allows you to handle receipts from your warehouse in 3 different ways:"
|
||
msgstr "Odoo允许有3种方式从仓库收货 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:15
|
||
msgid "**One step**: Receive goods directly in stock."
|
||
msgstr " **一步**: 直接收货入库"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:17
|
||
msgid "**Two steps**: Unload in input location then go to stock."
|
||
msgstr " **二步**: 先入到入库区然后再进入库存"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Three steps**: Unload in input location, go through a quality control "
|
||
"before being admitted in stock."
|
||
msgstr " **三步**: 在收货区域卸货, 然后质检检验, 最后进入库存。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo uses **routes** to define exactly how you will handle the different "
|
||
"receipt steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. In "
|
||
"standard, the reception is a one step process, but changing the "
|
||
"configuration can allow to have 2 or even 3 steps."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo使用 **路线** 准确的定义了你如何进行收货步骤。该配置在仓库层面完成。标准状况下, 收货一步完成, 但是通过更改配置可以进行2或者3步收货。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:27
|
||
msgid "The principles are the following:"
|
||
msgstr "原则如下 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:29
|
||
msgid "**One step**: You receive the goods directly in your stock."
|
||
msgstr " **一步** 收货直接入库"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Two steps**: You receive the goods in an input area then transfer them "
|
||
"from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in "
|
||
"your stock, they will not be available for further processing."
|
||
msgstr " **二步**: 在收货区域收货然后从收货区域转移到库存, 因为在库存内货物不再转移, 所以不会有进一步的调拨。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Three steps**: In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received "
|
||
"good. The goal is to check that the products correspond to the quality "
|
||
"requirements agreed with the suppliers. Adding a quality control step in the"
|
||
" goods receipt process can become essential."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **三步**: 在很多公司内, "
|
||
"有必要评估收到的货物。目的是检查和供应商达成一致的所需产品的质量和所收产品一致。在产品的接收过程中添加一个质量控制步骤变得有必要。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You receive the goods in an input area, then transfer them into quality area"
|
||
" for quality control. When your quality check process finishes then you can "
|
||
"move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you may change the quantity and "
|
||
"only transfer to Stock the quantity that is valid and decide that you will "
|
||
"return the quantity that is not good."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"你在收货区域接收货物, 然后转移货物到质检区域进行质量检验。当质量检验完成就可以把货物从质检区域移到库存。当然, "
|
||
"你可以更改数量并且只把满足质量标准的产品移到库存并把质量不过关的产品退回。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:55
|
||
msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo中默认的配置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68
|
||
msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers"
|
||
msgstr "批次和序列号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?"
|
||
msgstr "批次号和序列号的区别是什么?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Introduction"
|
||
msgstr "介绍"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, lots and serial numbers have similarities in their functional "
|
||
"system but are different in their behavior. They are both managed within the"
|
||
" **Inventory**, **Purchases** and **Sales** app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在Odoo中, 批次号和序列号在系统中有者相同的逻辑但是不同的表现行为。他们都是在 **库存** , **采购** , **销售** 模块中使用。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Lots** correspond to a certain number of products you received and store "
|
||
"altogether in one single pack."
|
||
msgstr " **批次** 和一定数量的收到并放在一起的产品相随。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Serial numbers** are identification numbers given to one product in "
|
||
"particular, to allow to track the history of the item from reception to "
|
||
"delivery and after-sales."
|
||
msgstr " **序列号** 是一个单独产品的唯一标识码, 能让我们从收货到发货再到售后进行追踪。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:20
|
||
msgid "When to use"
|
||
msgstr "什么时候使用"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Lots** are interesting for products you receive in great quantity and for "
|
||
"which a lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other "
|
||
"info. Lots will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a "
|
||
"production fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or "
|
||
"food."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **批次号** 通常在大批量的产品收货中使用, 这能够帮你在报表, 质检, "
|
||
"或者其余信息中反映出来。批次号能定义一些产品有或者在同一生产环境中。在食品或者服装行业的批量生产中很有用。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Serial numbers** are interesting for items that could require after-sales "
|
||
"service, such as smartphones, laptops, fridges, and any electronic devices. "
|
||
"You could use the manufacturer's serial number or your own, depending on the"
|
||
" way you manage these products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **序列号** 对于那些需要售后的产品来说比较有用, 例如手机, 笔记本电脑, 以及其余的电子设备。依赖于管理产品的方式, "
|
||
"你可以使用生成序列号或者自己的序列号。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:34
|
||
msgid "When not to use"
|
||
msgstr "什么时候不用"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Storing consumable products such as kitchen roll, toilet paper, pens and "
|
||
"paper blocks in lots would make no sense at all, as there are very few "
|
||
"chances that you can return them for production fault."
|
||
msgstr "消耗品例如厨房用纸, 厕所用纸, 笔或者手写纸等使用批次是没有意义的, 因为这些产品你从来不会退货。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:40
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the other hand, giving a serial number to every product is a time-"
|
||
"consuming task that will have a purpose only in the case of items that have "
|
||
"a warranty and/or after-sales services. Putting a serial number on bread, "
|
||
"for instance, makes no sense at all."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"另一方面, 只有那些使用质保期现/或者售后服务的产品使用单个产品的序列号, 除了这些, "
|
||
"给产品分配序列号是浪费时间的行为。例如给一块面包分配一个序列号是没有一点意义的。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46
|
||
msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`serial_numbers` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47
|
||
msgid ":doc:`lots`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`lots` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Manage expiration dates"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked"
|
||
" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks "
|
||
"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to "
|
||
"customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even"
|
||
" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15
|
||
msgid "Configurations"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Application configuration"
|
||
msgstr "应用配置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to"
|
||
" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and "
|
||
"*Expiration Dates* features."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90
|
||
msgid "Product configuration"
|
||
msgstr "产品配置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory "
|
||
"tab* of the product form:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start "
|
||
"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the "
|
||
"lot/serial number;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become "
|
||
"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial "
|
||
"number;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be "
|
||
"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be "
|
||
"raised on the lot/serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44
|
||
msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated "
|
||
"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the "
|
||
"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Expiration Alerts"
|
||
msgstr "到期警报"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do "
|
||
"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-"
|
||
"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their "
|
||
"alert date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Manage lots of identical products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a "
|
||
"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots "
|
||
"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production "
|
||
"fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the "
|
||
"traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced "
|
||
"traceability."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo中的复式管理使你进行非常高级的追踪。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Setting Up"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21
|
||
msgid "Application Configuration"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to "
|
||
"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. "
|
||
"Then, click on save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Product Configuration"
|
||
msgstr "产品配置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial "
|
||
"numbers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, "
|
||
"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47
|
||
msgid "Manage Lots"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot "
|
||
"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57
|
||
msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59
|
||
msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, "
|
||
"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add"
|
||
" a line* again to register a new lot number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75
|
||
msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your "
|
||
"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial "
|
||
"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. "
|
||
"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are "
|
||
"contained in each one of the lots."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93
|
||
msgid "Operation Types"
|
||
msgstr "作业类型"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots "
|
||
"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to "
|
||
"*Configuration > Operation Types*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide "
|
||
"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By "
|
||
"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and "
|
||
"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have "
|
||
"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to "
|
||
"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111
|
||
msgid "Lots traceability"
|
||
msgstr "批次追踪"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they "
|
||
"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were "
|
||
"shipped to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > "
|
||
"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the"
|
||
" lot number has been used."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the "
|
||
"*Location* stat button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Work with serial numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number "
|
||
"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, "
|
||
"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will "
|
||
"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its "
|
||
"last movement."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-"
|
||
"entry management is the feature you need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to "
|
||
"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the "
|
||
"feature and hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers."
|
||
" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your "
|
||
"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the "
|
||
"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42
|
||
msgid "Manage Serial Numbers"
|
||
msgstr "管理序列号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify "
|
||
"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50
|
||
msgid "Manual assignation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73
|
||
msgid "Multi-assignation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89
|
||
msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly "
|
||
"need to open the detailed operations of your picking."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, "
|
||
"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can "
|
||
"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically "
|
||
"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial "
|
||
"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial "
|
||
"number to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80
|
||
msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you "
|
||
"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* "
|
||
"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you"
|
||
" need."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106
|
||
msgid "Operation types"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each "
|
||
"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the"
|
||
" *Inventory* app."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers "
|
||
"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only "
|
||
"allowed at product reception."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be "
|
||
"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124
|
||
msgid "Serial Number traceability"
|
||
msgstr "序列号追踪"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were "
|
||
"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped "
|
||
"to."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >"
|
||
" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your "
|
||
"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in "
|
||
"which documents the serial number has been used."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the"
|
||
" *Location* button available on the serial number form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Miscellaneous Operations"
|
||
msgstr "杂项操作"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email"
|
||
" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is "
|
||
"company-specific."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. "
|
||
"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow "
|
||
"next to its name."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23
|
||
msgid "Send email at delivery validation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a "
|
||
"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and"
|
||
" do the same for the delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will "
|
||
"be included in the standard email template."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having"
|
||
" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new"
|
||
" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure "
|
||
"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to "
|
||
"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through "
|
||
"advanced settings."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the "
|
||
"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* "
|
||
"section. Now, hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28
|
||
msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock"
|
||
msgstr "代销库存的收货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. "
|
||
"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has "
|
||
"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39
|
||
msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still "
|
||
"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Scrap Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are "
|
||
"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this "
|
||
"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or"
|
||
" stored, you have to scrap them."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of "
|
||
"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap "
|
||
"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its"
|
||
" basic material content, recoverable through recycling."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap "
|
||
"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to "
|
||
"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* "
|
||
"feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, "
|
||
"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a "
|
||
"virtual location will be created for scrapped products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39
|
||
msgid "Different ways to scrap products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a "
|
||
"delivery order, and from an internal transfer."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Scrap from receipt"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > "
|
||
"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered "
|
||
"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do "
|
||
"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68
|
||
msgid "Scrap from delivery order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > "
|
||
"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the "
|
||
"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be "
|
||
"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the "
|
||
"button on the top right corner of the document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93
|
||
msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to "
|
||
"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the "
|
||
"scrap button that is on the top left of the document."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by "
|
||
"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, "
|
||
"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from "
|
||
"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual "
|
||
"scrap location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if"
|
||
" necessary."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. "
|
||
"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In "
|
||
"multi-company, this feature is company-specific."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify"
|
||
" it by clicking on the arrow on the right."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner"
|
||
" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30
|
||
msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number "
|
||
"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will "
|
||
"be included in the SMS template."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Planning"
|
||
msgstr "计划"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, "
|
||
"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates "
|
||
"scheduled dates via the scheduler."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, "
|
||
"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in "
|
||
"Odoo."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled "
|
||
"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, "
|
||
"etc.) to your partners and/or clients."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25
|
||
msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different "
|
||
"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and "
|
||
"manufacturing lead time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Supplier lead time"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your "
|
||
"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the "
|
||
"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this "
|
||
"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + "
|
||
"Delivery Lead Time*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, "
|
||
"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56
|
||
msgid "Customer Lead Time"
|
||
msgstr "客户前置时间"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your "
|
||
"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product "
|
||
"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead "
|
||
"time*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67
|
||
msgid "Manufacturing lead time"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the "
|
||
"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to "
|
||
"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea "
|
||
"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of "
|
||
"delays."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for "
|
||
"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85
|
||
msgid "Security lead time for sales"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will "
|
||
"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for "
|
||
"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early "
|
||
"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation "
|
||
"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to "
|
||
"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* "
|
||
"and enable the feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104
|
||
msgid "Security lead time for purchase"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that "
|
||
"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead "
|
||
"times, not for sales."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will "
|
||
"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and"
|
||
" enable the feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121
|
||
msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing "
|
||
"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected "
|
||
"manufacturing days."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable"
|
||
" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence"
|
||
" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in"
|
||
" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push "
|
||
"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to "
|
||
"use this feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149
|
||
msgid "At the sale order level"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152
|
||
msgid "Expected date"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option "
|
||
"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale "
|
||
"order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the "
|
||
"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed "
|
||
"based on the different lead times."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than"
|
||
" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a "
|
||
"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to "
|
||
"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the"
|
||
" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety "
|
||
"Days);"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase "
|
||
"days);"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of "
|
||
"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they "
|
||
"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6
|
||
msgid "What is a scheduler?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes "
|
||
"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules "
|
||
"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14
|
||
msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling"
|
||
msgstr "计算需求/排程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet "
|
||
"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or "
|
||
"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into "
|
||
"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be"
|
||
" started first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, "
|
||
"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Configure and run the scheduler"
|
||
msgstr "配置并运行排程器"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Run the scheduler manually"
|
||
msgstr "手工运行排程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run "
|
||
"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for "
|
||
"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production "
|
||
"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to "
|
||
"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and "
|
||
"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the "
|
||
"starting time of the scheduler."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Products"
|
||
msgstr "租赁产品"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy"
|
||
msgstr "如何选择正确的补货策略"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but "
|
||
"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and "
|
||
"delivery strategies."
|
||
msgstr "最小库存规则和按单补货的结果相似,但规则不同,应根据你的制造和发货策略来选用。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10
|
||
msgid "Terminology"
|
||
msgstr "术语"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Minimum stock rule"
|
||
msgstr "最小库存规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum "
|
||
"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or "
|
||
"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its"
|
||
" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the"
|
||
" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"最小库存规则用于确保你已经有了制造和/或响应消费者需求的最小库存量。当某产品的库存水平到达最小量时,系统自动生成一个采购订单,该订单的数量能满足最小库存量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71
|
||
msgid "Make to Order"
|
||
msgstr "按单补货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of "
|
||
"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the "
|
||
"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated "
|
||
"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product."
|
||
msgstr "按单补货功能将触发与产品相关的销售订单的采购单。系统**不会**检查现有库存。意味着无论现有产品的数量是多少,都会生成一个采购订单草稿。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33
|
||
msgid "Minimum stock rules"
|
||
msgstr "最小库存规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory "
|
||
"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop"
|
||
" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock "
|
||
"values for a given product."
|
||
msgstr "最小库存规则可通过库存模块进行配置。在“库存控制”下拉菜单中选择\"再次订购规则\" ,然后点击\"创建\"设置某给定产品的最小与最大库存值。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity "
|
||
"multiple\" fields"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the "
|
||
"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier."
|
||
msgstr "然后点击产品,在\"库存子菜单\"访问相关产品的表单。不要忘记选择一个供应商。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be "
|
||
"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation."
|
||
msgstr "别忘记选择正确的产品类别。消耗品无法贮存,不可计入库存盘点数。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through "
|
||
"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any "
|
||
"other module where products are available)."
|
||
msgstr "可在产品表单中配置按单补货 :menuselection:`库存 --> 库存控制 --> 产品(或在产品可用的任一其他模块中配置)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64
|
||
msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"."
|
||
msgstr "在产品表单的库存项下,点击\"按单补货\"。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70
|
||
msgid "Choice between the two options"
|
||
msgstr "选择两个选项其中一个"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory "
|
||
"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum "
|
||
"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your "
|
||
"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"两种选项的选择依赖于你的库存策略。如果你想有一点库存缓冲并总是在仓库中留有最少的存货数量, "
|
||
"那么就可以使用最小库存规则。如果想只是在销售订单确认的状态下才去补充存货, 那么就建议使用按照订单补货。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Use Different Units of Measure"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary."
|
||
" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of"
|
||
" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you "
|
||
"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products "
|
||
"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your "
|
||
"customers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product."
|
||
msgstr "在Odoo中你可以设置一个产品可以有不同的计量单位。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the "
|
||
"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25
|
||
msgid "Create New Units of Measure"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit "
|
||
"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use "
|
||
"for the Egg product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert "
|
||
"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same "
|
||
"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure "
|
||
"for the category which is “Units” here."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43
|
||
msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product "
|
||
"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click "
|
||
"on *Edit*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in "
|
||
"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal "
|
||
"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of "
|
||
"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59
|
||
msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62
|
||
msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which"
|
||
" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*"
|
||
" it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of "
|
||
"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually "
|
||
"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to"
|
||
" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been "
|
||
"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82
|
||
msgid "Replenishment"
|
||
msgstr "补货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, "
|
||
"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94
|
||
msgid "Sell in bigger UoM"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to "
|
||
"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically "
|
||
"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the "
|
||
"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3
|
||
msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Units of Measure"
|
||
msgstr "计量单位"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you "
|
||
"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your"
|
||
" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your "
|
||
"supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done "
|
||
"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the "
|
||
"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run "
|
||
"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase "
|
||
"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Packages"
|
||
msgstr "包裹"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several "
|
||
"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can "
|
||
"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows "
|
||
"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50
|
||
msgid "Packaging"
|
||
msgstr "包装"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you "
|
||
"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice "
|
||
"and the power plug."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They "
|
||
"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning "
|
||
"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the"
|
||
" packing on the picking."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Inventory Adjustment"
|
||
msgstr "库存调整"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically "
|
||
"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how"
|
||
" they are triggered."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount "
|
||
"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to"
|
||
" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum "
|
||
"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed "
|
||
"quantity to reach the maximum stock level."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or "
|
||
"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product "
|
||
"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will"
|
||
" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the "
|
||
"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will "
|
||
"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough "
|
||
"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be "
|
||
"generated for the total quantity requested."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28
|
||
msgid "Reordering Rules"
|
||
msgstr "订货规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu "
|
||
"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to "
|
||
"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in "
|
||
"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to"
|
||
" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the "
|
||
"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity "
|
||
"will be used."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to "
|
||
"receive the products or to order them to the vendor."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be "
|
||
"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each "
|
||
"location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a "
|
||
"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure "
|
||
"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the "
|
||
"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route "
|
||
"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A "
|
||
"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through "
|
||
"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module "
|
||
"where products are available)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can "
|
||
"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*"
|
||
" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male "
|
||
"sure you have a *BoM* for this product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate"
|
||
" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will "
|
||
"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > "
|
||
"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this "
|
||
"`*documentation* "
|
||
"<https://docs.google.com/document/d/14xNFdUOAbfzdloqXcjq67T8qjjlY7pu4Db6BbR4_fdA/edit>`__."
|
||
" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will "
|
||
"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets "
|
||
"resupplied."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your "
|
||
"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected,"
|
||
" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in "
|
||
"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. "
|
||
"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run "
|
||
"scheduler\\*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from"
|
||
" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in"
|
||
" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is "
|
||
"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from "
|
||
"Second warehouse\\*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Valuation Methods"
|
||
msgstr "计价方法"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:5
|
||
msgid "How to do an inventory valuation? (Anglo-Saxon Accounting)"
|
||
msgstr "如何进行存货计价?(海洋法系会计)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:7
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:7
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Every year your inventory valuation has to be recorded in your balance "
|
||
"sheet. This implies two main choices:"
|
||
msgstr "每年你的库存价值都需要在余额表中记录, 这依赖于两个主要选项 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:10
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"the way you compute the cost of your stored items (Standard vs. Average vs. "
|
||
"Real Price);"
|
||
msgstr "计算库存产品的成本方式(标准, 平均成本, 实时价格);"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:13
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"the way you record the inventory value into your books (periodic vs. "
|
||
"Perpetual)."
|
||
msgstr "在账簿中记录库存价值的方式(定期估值和不间断估值)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:17
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:17
|
||
msgid "Costing Method"
|
||
msgstr "成本方法"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:63
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:64
|
||
msgid "Standard Price"
|
||
msgstr "标准价格"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:28
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:73
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:128
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:181
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:29
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:74
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:129
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:182
|
||
msgid "Operation"
|
||
msgstr "操作"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:29
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:74
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:129
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:182
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:75
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:130
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:183
|
||
msgid "Unit Cost"
|
||
msgstr "单位成本"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:75
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:130
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:183
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:31
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:76
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:131
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:184
|
||
msgid "Qty On Hand"
|
||
msgstr "在手数量"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:31
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:76
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:131
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:184
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:32
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:132
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:185
|
||
msgid "Delta Value"
|
||
msgstr "差异值"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:32
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:132
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:185
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:33
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:78
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:133
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:186
|
||
msgid "Inventory Value"
|
||
msgstr "库存价值"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:34
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:39
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:44
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:49
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:55
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:84
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:139
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:192
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:202
|
||
msgid "$10"
|
||
msgstr "$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:35
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:80
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:135
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:188
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:36
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:81
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:136
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:189
|
||
msgid "0"
|
||
msgstr "0"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:37
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:79
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:82
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:134
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:137
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:187
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:190
|
||
msgid "$0"
|
||
msgstr "$0"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:38
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:83
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:138
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:191
|
||
msgid "Receive 8 Products at $10"
|
||
msgstr "收到8个产品, 合计 $10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:40
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:85
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:140
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:193
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:41
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:86
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:141
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:194
|
||
msgid "8"
|
||
msgstr "8"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:41
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:86
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:141
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:194
|
||
msgid "+8*$10"
|
||
msgstr "+8*$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:42
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:87
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:142
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:195
|
||
msgid "$80"
|
||
msgstr "$80"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:43
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:143
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:196
|
||
msgid "Receive 4 Products at $16"
|
||
msgstr "收到4个产品, 合计 $16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:90
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:145
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:198
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:46
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:91
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:146
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:199
|
||
msgid "12"
|
||
msgstr "12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:46
|
||
msgid "+4*$10"
|
||
msgstr "+4*$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:47
|
||
msgid "$120"
|
||
msgstr "$120"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:48
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:93
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:148
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:201
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:49
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:94
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:149
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:202
|
||
msgid "Deliver 10 Products"
|
||
msgstr "发货10片产品"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:95
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:150
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:203
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:51
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:96
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:151
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:204
|
||
msgid "2"
|
||
msgstr "2"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-10*$10"
|
||
msgstr "-10*$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:53
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:206
|
||
msgid "$20"
|
||
msgstr "$20"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:54
|
||
msgid "Receive 2 Products at $9"
|
||
msgstr "收到2个产品, 合计 $9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:56
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:101
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:156
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:209
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:57
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:102
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:157
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:210
|
||
msgid "4"
|
||
msgstr "4"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:57
|
||
msgid "+2*$10"
|
||
msgstr "+2*$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:58
|
||
msgid "$40"
|
||
msgstr "$40"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:60
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Standard Price** means you estimate the cost price based on direct "
|
||
"materials, direct labor and manufacturing overhead at the end of a specific "
|
||
"period (usually once a year). You enter this cost price in the product form."
|
||
msgstr " **标准价格** 意味着在期末(通常是一年)根据产品的直接材料, 直接劳动以及制造费用等评估成本。你可以在产品页面输入成本价格。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:118
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:119
|
||
msgid "Average Price"
|
||
msgstr "平均价格"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:89
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:94
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:144
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:197
|
||
msgid "$12"
|
||
msgstr "$12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:91
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:146
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:199
|
||
msgid "+4*$16"
|
||
msgstr "+4*$16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:92
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:147
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:200
|
||
msgid "$144"
|
||
msgstr "$144"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-10*$12"
|
||
msgstr "-10*$12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:98
|
||
msgid "$24"
|
||
msgstr "$24"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:99
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:154
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:207
|
||
msgid "Receive 2 Products at $6"
|
||
msgstr "收到2个产品, 合计 $6"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:100
|
||
msgid "$9"
|
||
msgstr "$9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:102
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:157
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:210
|
||
msgid "+2*$6"
|
||
msgstr "+2*$6"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:103
|
||
msgid "$36"
|
||
msgstr "$36"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:105
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:106
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Average Price** method recomputes the cost price as a receipt order "
|
||
"has been processed, based on prices defined in tied purchase orders: FORMULA"
|
||
" (see here attached)"
|
||
msgstr " **平均价格** 的方法是当有收货的时候系统会根据采购订单的采购价格计算成本 :公式(见下)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:109
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:110
|
||
msgid "The average cost does not change when products leave the warehouse."
|
||
msgstr "当产品出库的时候平均价格不变。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:111
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From an accounting point of view, this method is mainly justified in case of"
|
||
" huge purchase price variations and is quite unusual due to its operational "
|
||
"complexity. Your actually need a software like Odoo to easily keep this cost"
|
||
" up-to-date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"从会计的角度来看, 这种方式在采购价格经常变动的时候调整, "
|
||
"由于此种操作的复杂性该方法不经常使用。如果要用的话就需要例如Odoo这样的软件来进行实时更新。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:116
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:117
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This method is dedicated to advanced users. It requires well established "
|
||
"business processes because the order in which you process receipt orders "
|
||
"matters in the cost computation."
|
||
msgstr "该方法用于特定的高级用户。因为在完成收货单的过程中会进行成本计算, 所以需要很好的评估业务流程。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:171
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:172
|
||
msgid "FIFO"
|
||
msgstr "先进先出(FIFO)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:149
|
||
msgid "$16"
|
||
msgstr "$16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-8*$10"
|
||
msgstr "-8*$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-2*$16"
|
||
msgstr "-2*$16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:153
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:211
|
||
msgid "$32"
|
||
msgstr "$32"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:155
|
||
msgid "$11"
|
||
msgstr "$11"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:158
|
||
msgid "$44"
|
||
msgstr "$44"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:160
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:213
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:161
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:214
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For **Real Price** (FIFO, LIFO, FEFO, etc), the costing is further refined "
|
||
"by the removal strategy set on the warehouse location or product's internal "
|
||
"category. The default strategy is FIFO. With such method, your inventory "
|
||
"value is computed from the real cost of your stored products (cfr. "
|
||
"Quantitative Valuation) and not from the cost price shown in the product "
|
||
"form. Whenever you ship items, the cost price is reset to the cost of the "
|
||
"last item(s) shipped. This cost price is used to value any product not "
|
||
"received from a purchase order (e.g. inventory adjustments)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"对于 **实际价格** (FIFO, LIFO, FEFO, 等), "
|
||
"需要进一步在仓库的库位上或者在产品的内部分类页面设置出库策略。默认的设置是FIFO。在该种方式下, 库存价值会遵从计算存储商品的真实的价值(cfr, "
|
||
"定量估值)而不是按照产品页面的成本来计算。只要发出货物, 成本价格就是会变成最后一次出货产品()的成本, "
|
||
"这种成本方式用在哪些还没有接收的货物的估价上(例如, 库存调整)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:170
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:171
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"FIFO is advised if you manage all your workflow into Odoo (Sales, Purchases,"
|
||
" Inventory). It suits any kind of users."
|
||
msgstr "如果你在Odoo中管理所有的流程(销售, 采购, 库存)建议使用FIFO。它符合所有的用户。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:223
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:224
|
||
msgid "LIFO (not accepted in IFRS)"
|
||
msgstr "LIFO (国际财务报告准则已弃用)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-4*$16"
|
||
msgstr "-4*$16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-6*$10"
|
||
msgstr "-6*$10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:208
|
||
msgid "$8"
|
||
msgstr "$8"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:223
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:224
|
||
msgid "LIFO is not permitted outside the United States."
|
||
msgstr "美国之外不能使用LIFO。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:225
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:226
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo allows any method. The default one is **Standard Price**. To change it,"
|
||
" check **Use a 'Fixed', 'Real' or 'Average' price costing method** in "
|
||
"Purchase settings. Then set the costing method from products' internal "
|
||
"categories. Categories show up in the Inventory tab of the product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo中可以使用任何方式, 默认的是 **标准成本** 。要更改的话, 可以在采购的设置中勾选 **使用'固定','实际','平均'价格等成本方法**"
|
||
" 。然后在产品的内部分类页面设置成本方法。产品的内部分类可以在产品的库存页面看到。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:231
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:232
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Whatever the method is, Odoo provides a full inventory valuation in "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Reports --> Inventory Valuation` (i.e. current"
|
||
" quantity in stock * cost price)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"不管使用何种方式, Odoo都会提供在下列地方提供所有的库存计价, 进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) --> "
|
||
"报表(Reports) -->存货计价(Inventory Valuation)` (即. 当前库存数量 * 成本价格)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:236
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:237
|
||
msgid "Periodic Inventory Valuation"
|
||
msgstr "定期存货计价"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:238
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:239
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In a periodic inventory valuation, goods reception and outgoing shipments "
|
||
"have no direct impact in the accounting. At the end of the month or year, "
|
||
"the accountant posts one journal entry representing the value of the "
|
||
"physical inventory."
|
||
msgstr "定期存货计价, 收货和发货都不会直接对会计产生影响, 在月末或者年末, 会计登录一张代表实际库存的会计分录。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:243
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:244
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This is the default configuration in Odoo and it works out-of-the-box. Check"
|
||
" following operations and find out how Odoo is managing the accounting "
|
||
"postings."
|
||
msgstr "这是Odoo中默认的配置并且可以拿来即用。检查以下作业并查看Odoo如何管理会计过账。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:263
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263
|
||
msgid "Vendor Bill"
|
||
msgstr "供应商账单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:253
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:271
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:310
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:254
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:271
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:305
|
||
msgid "\\"
|
||
msgstr "\\"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:253
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:271
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:310
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:254
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:271
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:305
|
||
msgid "Debit"
|
||
msgstr "借方"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:253
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:271
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:310
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:254
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:271
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:305
|
||
msgid "Credit"
|
||
msgstr "信用"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:255
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:256
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:307
|
||
msgid "Assets: Inventory"
|
||
msgstr "资产 :存货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:255
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:256
|
||
msgid "50"
|
||
msgstr "50"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:256
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:257
|
||
msgid "Assets: Deferred Tax Assets"
|
||
msgstr "资产 :递延税项资产"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:256
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:257
|
||
msgid "4.68"
|
||
msgstr "4.68"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:257
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:258
|
||
msgid "Liabilities: Accounts Payable"
|
||
msgstr "负债 :应付账款"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:257
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:258
|
||
msgid "54.68"
|
||
msgstr "54.68"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:263
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281
|
||
msgid "Configuration:"
|
||
msgstr "配置 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:261
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:262
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Purchased Goods: defined on the product or on the internal category of "
|
||
"related product (Expense Account field)"
|
||
msgstr "材料采购科目 :在产品或者产品的产品所属的内部分类上设置(费用科目字段)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:263
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Deferred Tax Assets: defined on the tax used on the purchase order line"
|
||
msgstr "递延税资产 :在采购订单行上使用的税上设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:264
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:264
|
||
msgid "Accounts Payable: defined on the vendor related to the bill"
|
||
msgstr "应付账款 :定义在账单相关的供应商"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:265
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:265
|
||
msgid "Goods Receptions"
|
||
msgstr "货物接收"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:266
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:287
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:289
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:266
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:286
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:288
|
||
msgid "No Journal Entry"
|
||
msgstr "没有会计分录"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:284
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:283
|
||
msgid "Customer Invoice"
|
||
msgstr "客户发票"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:273
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:273
|
||
msgid "Revenues: Sold Goods"
|
||
msgstr "收入 :销售货物"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:273
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:273
|
||
msgid "100"
|
||
msgstr "100"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:274
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:274
|
||
msgid "Liabilities: Deferred Tax Liabilities"
|
||
msgstr "负债 :递延税项负债"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:274
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:274
|
||
msgid "9"
|
||
msgstr "9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:275
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:275
|
||
msgid "Assets: Accounts Receivable"
|
||
msgstr "资产 :应收账款"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:275
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:275
|
||
msgid "109"
|
||
msgstr "109"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:279
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:279
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Revenues: defined on the product or on the internal category of related "
|
||
"product (Income Account field)"
|
||
msgstr "收入 :在产品或者产品所属种类的页面设置(收入科目字段)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:281
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:280
|
||
msgid "Deferred Tax Liabilities: defined on the tax used on the invoice line"
|
||
msgstr "递延税项负债 :在发票行上使用的税上设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281
|
||
msgid "Accounts Receivable: defined on the customer (Receivable Account)"
|
||
msgstr "应收账款 : 定义在客户(应收科目)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:284
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:283
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The fiscal position used on the invoice may have a rule that replaces the "
|
||
"Income Account or the tax defined on the product by another one."
|
||
msgstr "发票上所使用的财政状况可能有替代收入账户或另外一个在产品定义的税收规则。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:286
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:285
|
||
msgid "Customer Shipping"
|
||
msgstr "客户发货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:289
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:288
|
||
msgid "Manufacturing Orders"
|
||
msgstr "生产数量"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:295
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:294
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"At the end of the month/year, your company does a physical inventory or just"
|
||
" relies on the inventory in Odoo to value the stock into your books."
|
||
msgstr "在月/年末, 依靠公司盘点或者只是依赖于Odoo中的库存来计算库存价值并入账。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:298
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then you need to break down the purchase balance into both the inventory and"
|
||
" the cost of goods sold using the following formula:"
|
||
msgstr "然后你需要适应以下公式把采购产品的余额分成库存和货物销售的成本 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:301
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Cost of goods sold (COGS) = Starting inventory value + Purchases – Closing "
|
||
"inventory value"
|
||
msgstr "销售货物的成本 (COGS) = 期初库存价值 + 采购产品 – 期末库存价值"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:303
|
||
msgid "To update the stock valuation in your books, record such an entry:"
|
||
msgstr "要在账簿中更新存货计价, 记录一笔分录 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:312
|
||
msgid "Assets: Inventory (closing value)"
|
||
msgstr "资产 :库存(期末余额)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:312
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:313
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:314
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:315
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:307
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:308
|
||
msgid "X"
|
||
msgstr "X"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:313
|
||
msgid "Expenses: Cost of Good Sold"
|
||
msgstr "费用 :货物销售成本"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:314
|
||
msgid "Expenses: Purchased Goods"
|
||
msgstr "费用 :采购货物"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:315
|
||
msgid "Assets: Inventory (starting value)"
|
||
msgstr "资产 :存货(期初值)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:319
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:319
|
||
msgid "Perpetual Inventory Valuation"
|
||
msgstr "永续存货计价"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:321
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:321
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In a perpetual inventory valuation, goods receptions and outgoing shipments "
|
||
"are posted in your books in real time. The books are therefore always up-to-"
|
||
"date. This mode is dedicated to expert accountants and advanced users only. "
|
||
"As opposed to periodic valuation, it requires some extra configuration & "
|
||
"testing."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在持续的存货计价方式中, 收货和发货会即时的记账。因此, 账本是在这种情景下会一直不断更新。这种模式只能被会计专家和高级用户使用。相反的定义的估值方式,"
|
||
" 就需要额外的配置和测试。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:328
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:328
|
||
msgid "Let's take the case of a reseller."
|
||
msgstr "让我们举个分销商的例子"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:340
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:340
|
||
msgid "**Configuration:**"
|
||
msgstr " **配置 :** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:342
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:342
|
||
msgid "Accounts Receivable/Payable: defined on the partner (Accounting tab)"
|
||
msgstr "应收/应付账款: 定义在业务伙伴(会计页卡)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:344
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:344
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Deferred Tax Assets/Liabilities: defined on the tax used on the invoice line"
|
||
msgstr "递延税项资产或者负债 :定义在发票行上使用的税中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:347
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Revenues: defined on the product category as a default, or specifically to a"
|
||
" specific product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:350
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Expenses: this is where you should set the \"Cost of Goods Sold\" account. "
|
||
"Defined on the product category as a default value, or specifically on the "
|
||
"product form."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:354
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Goods Received Not Purchased: to set as Stock Input Account in product's "
|
||
"internal category"
|
||
msgstr "已收货但没有采购的, 设置为产品内部种类上的入库科目"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:357
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Goods Issued Not Invoiced: to set as Stock Output Account in product's "
|
||
"internal category"
|
||
msgstr "已发货但是还没有开票的货物 :在产品内部种类上设置为出库科目。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:360
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:352
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Inventory: to set as Stock Valuation Account in product's internal category"
|
||
msgstr "存货 :在产品的内部种类中设置为库存价值科目"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:362
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Price Difference: to set in product's internal category or in product form "
|
||
"as a specific replacement value"
|
||
msgstr "价格差异 :在产品或者产品的内部种类上设置形成一个特定替代值。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:367
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:356
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../../routes/strategies/removal`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../../routes/strategies/removal` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:368
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:357
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../../../accounting/others/inventory/avg_price_valuation`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../../../accounting/others/inventory/avg_price_valuation` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:369
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:358
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../../routes/costing/landed_costs`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../../routes/costing/landed_costs` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:5
|
||
msgid "How to do an inventory valuation? (Continental Accounting)"
|
||
msgstr "如何进行存货计价?(大陆法系会计)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:35
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:40
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:45
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:56
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:85
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:140
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:193
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:203
|
||
msgid "€10"
|
||
msgstr "€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:38
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:80
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:83
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:135
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:138
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:188
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:191
|
||
msgid "€0"
|
||
msgstr "€0"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:39
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:84
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:139
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:192
|
||
msgid "Receive 8 Products at €10"
|
||
msgstr "以€10的价格入库8个产品"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:42
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:87
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:142
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:195
|
||
msgid "+8*€10"
|
||
msgstr "+8 *€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:43
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:143
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:196
|
||
msgid "€80"
|
||
msgstr "€80"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:44
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:89
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:144
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:197
|
||
msgid "Receive 4 Products at €16"
|
||
msgstr "以€16的价格入库4个产品"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:47
|
||
msgid "+4*€10"
|
||
msgstr "+4 *€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:48
|
||
msgid "€120"
|
||
msgstr "€120"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-10*€10"
|
||
msgstr "-10 *€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:54
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:207
|
||
msgid "€20"
|
||
msgstr "€20"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:55
|
||
msgid "Receive 2 Products at €9"
|
||
msgstr "以€9的价格入库2个产品"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:58
|
||
msgid "+2*€10"
|
||
msgstr "+2 *€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:59
|
||
msgid "€40"
|
||
msgstr "€40"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:90
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:95
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:145
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:198
|
||
msgid "€12"
|
||
msgstr "€12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:92
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:147
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:200
|
||
msgid "+4*€16"
|
||
msgstr "+4 *€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:93
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:148
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:201
|
||
msgid "€144"
|
||
msgstr "€144"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-10*€12"
|
||
msgstr "-10 *€12"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:99
|
||
msgid "€24"
|
||
msgstr "€24"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:100
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:155
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:208
|
||
msgid "Receive 2 Products at €6"
|
||
msgstr "以€6的价格收到2 个产品"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:101
|
||
msgid "€9"
|
||
msgstr "€9"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:103
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:158
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:211
|
||
msgid "+2*€6"
|
||
msgstr "+2 *€6"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:104
|
||
msgid "€36"
|
||
msgstr "€36"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:150
|
||
msgid "€16"
|
||
msgstr "€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-8*€10"
|
||
msgstr "-8 *€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-2*€16"
|
||
msgstr "-2 *€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:154
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:212
|
||
msgid "€32"
|
||
msgstr "€32"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:156
|
||
msgid "€11"
|
||
msgstr "€11"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:159
|
||
msgid "€44"
|
||
msgstr "€44"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-4*€16"
|
||
msgstr "-4 *€16"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:0
|
||
msgid "-6*€10"
|
||
msgstr "-6 *€10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:209
|
||
msgid "€8"
|
||
msgstr "€8"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:297
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Create a journal entry to move the stock variation value from your "
|
||
"Profit&Loss section to your assets."
|
||
msgstr "创建一笔会计分录把库存变动值从盈利/损失部分移动到资产。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:308
|
||
msgid "Expenses: Inventory Variations"
|
||
msgstr "费用 :存货变动"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:311
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the stock value decreased, the **Inventory** account is credited and te "
|
||
"**Inventory Variations** debited."
|
||
msgstr "如果库存价值减少, 贷 **库存** 科目, 借 **库存变动** 科目。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:346
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Revenues/Expenses: defined by default on product's internal category; can be"
|
||
" also set in product form (Accounting tab) as a replacement value."
|
||
msgstr "营收/费用 : 默认的在产品的内部分类中定义, 也能在产品页面(会计页面)作为一个特定的值定义。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:349
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Inventory Variations: to set as Stock Input/Output Account in product's "
|
||
"internal category"
|
||
msgstr "库存变动科目 :在内部产品类别的库存入库/出库科目处进行设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Warehouses"
|
||
msgstr "仓库"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?"
|
||
msgstr "仓库和位置之间的差别是什么?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items "
|
||
"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between "
|
||
"warehouses."
|
||
msgstr "在Odoo中, 在Odoo中 **仓库** 是你存放货物的实际的建筑/地方。你可以设置多仓库并在不同的仓库质检调拨。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be "
|
||
"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an "
|
||
"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is "
|
||
"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure "
|
||
"as much locations as you need under one warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **库位** 是仓库中的一个特定的位置。它可以被认为是仓库的下级, 一个货架, 一层楼, 一个通道, 等等。因此, 一个库位只能是你的仓库的一部分, "
|
||
"不能把一个库位和多个仓库链接起来。在一个仓库下你可以配置足够多的库位。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15
|
||
msgid "There are 3 types of locations:"
|
||
msgstr "有3种类型的位置 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the "
|
||
"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and "
|
||
"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **物理库位** 是你所拥有的仓库中的内部库位, 是你的仓库的一部分。它们可以是仓库中的装货区域, 卸货区域, 货架或者一个区域, 等等。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's "
|
||
"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only "
|
||
"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse."
|
||
msgstr " **业务伙伴库位** 是客户和/或供应商仓库中的位置。它们和物理库位的使用一样, 只不过这些库位的所有者不是你。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which "
|
||
"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or "
|
||
"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of "
|
||
"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into "
|
||
"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **虚拟库位** 是指在你仓库中没有实际物理地方的位置, 但是库存中没有实际存放(或是不再有)的产品可以放置在这里。当你要把产品移出你的库存(在 "
|
||
"**盘点库位** ), 或者要计算那些已经采购但是还在路途中( **补货库位** )没有到你的仓库的产品的数量的时候, 就可以很方便的使用这种库位。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your "
|
||
"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives "
|
||
"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the "
|
||
"organization of your warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在Odoo中, 库位按照级别进行架构组织。根据库位之间的父-子关系, "
|
||
"你可以把库位配置为一个树形结构。这能让你对库存操作进行详细的分析以及对仓库进行更好的管理。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37
|
||
msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38
|
||
msgid ":doc:`location_creation`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`location_creation` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Create a New Location"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate"
|
||
" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory "
|
||
"application > Configuration > Settings*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > "
|
||
"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the "
|
||
"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, "
|
||
"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed"
|
||
" to a location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when"
|
||
" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a "
|
||
"Return Location?*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode"
|
||
" which will correspond to this location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are "
|
||
"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, "
|
||
"containing all the sublocations in it."
|
||
msgstr "一个仓库和一个库位对应, 因为库位是分级的, Odoo会自动的创建一个仓库的父库位, 随后所有的库位在该库位下。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Create a New Warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-"
|
||
"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be "
|
||
"automatically activated at the same time."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*"
|
||
" to add a new warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a "
|
||
"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the "
|
||
"different warehouse documents."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-"
|
||
"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one"
|
||
" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit "
|
||
"it afterward."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*"
|
||
" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due "
|
||
"to the creation of a new warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Process Overview"
|
||
msgstr "过程概览"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25
|
||
msgid "Deliver Products from Stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6
|
||
msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in "
|
||
"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button"
|
||
" and enter the name of your product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this"
|
||
" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted "
|
||
"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but"
|
||
" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to "
|
||
"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is "
|
||
"described in the following print screens."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be "
|
||
"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities."
|
||
" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will "
|
||
"go out of your stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately "
|
||
"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the "
|
||
"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding "
|
||
"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, "
|
||
"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product "
|
||
"forecasts."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56
|
||
msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly "
|
||
"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the "
|
||
"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Set your Initial Stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product "
|
||
"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19
|
||
msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an "
|
||
"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You "
|
||
"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a "
|
||
"new one."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then "
|
||
"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products "
|
||
"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to "
|
||
"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the"
|
||
" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with "
|
||
"your other products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an "
|
||
"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units "
|
||
"added to the inventory adjustment."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between"
|
||
" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the "
|
||
"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the "
|
||
"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and "
|
||
"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this "
|
||
"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of "
|
||
"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as "
|
||
"been updated taking your modification into account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the "
|
||
"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different "
|
||
"variants into account."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the "
|
||
"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning "
|
||
"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means "
|
||
"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main "
|
||
"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22
|
||
msgid "Receive Products in Stock"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter"
|
||
" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is "
|
||
"described in the following print screens."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different "
|
||
"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the "
|
||
"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your"
|
||
" stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately "
|
||
"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the "
|
||
"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding "
|
||
"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, "
|
||
"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product "
|
||
"forecasts."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56
|
||
msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly "
|
||
"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find "
|
||
"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Advanced Routes"
|
||
msgstr "高级路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Concepts"
|
||
msgstr "概念"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly "
|
||
"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply"
|
||
" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load "
|
||
"another truck."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What"
|
||
" is cross-docking and is it for me? <https://www.odoo.com/blog/business-"
|
||
"hacks-1/post/what-is-cross-docking-and-is-it-for-me-270>`__"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the "
|
||
"*Multi-Step Routes*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21
|
||
msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work "
|
||
"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >"
|
||
" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that "
|
||
"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the "
|
||
"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the "
|
||
"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price "
|
||
"for it."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will "
|
||
"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. "
|
||
"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output "
|
||
"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* "
|
||
"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to "
|
||
"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* "
|
||
"because we still need to order the product to our supplier."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that "
|
||
"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the "
|
||
"products in the *Input Location*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to "
|
||
"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to "
|
||
"*Output*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to do inter-warehouses transfers?"
|
||
msgstr "如何做仓库间调拨?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you own different warehouses you might want to transfer goods from one "
|
||
"warehouse to the other. This is very easy thanks to the inventory "
|
||
"application in Odoo."
|
||
msgstr "如果有不同的仓库, 并且想在不同仓库间调拨货物。因为有了Odoo这些变得都很容易。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First of all you have to select the multi locations option. Go to "
|
||
":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` in the **Inventory "
|
||
"application**. Then tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** "
|
||
"option. Please don't forget to **apply** your changes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"首先需要选择多库位选项 :menuselection: 在 **库存模块** 中的 `配置 -->设置` 。然后勾选 **仓库进行多库位管理** "
|
||
"选项。不要忘了勾选之后点击 **应用** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This option should also be ticked if you wish to manage different locations "
|
||
"and routes in your warehouse."
|
||
msgstr "如果想在你的仓库中管理多库位以及路线就需要勾选该选项。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26
|
||
msgid "Creating a new warehouse"
|
||
msgstr "创建一个新的仓库"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:28
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The next step is to create your new warehouse. In the Inventory application "
|
||
"click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> "
|
||
"Warehouses`. You are now able to create your warehouse by clicking on "
|
||
"**Create**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"下一步是创建新的仓库, 在库存模块, 点击 :menuselection:`配置 -->仓库管理 -->仓库` 。现在就可以通过点击 **创建** "
|
||
"创建新的仓库。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Fill in a **Warehouse Name** and a **Short Name**. The short name is 5 "
|
||
"characters maximum."
|
||
msgstr "输入仓库名称和一个简称, 简称最多只能5个字。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"please note that the **Short Name** is very important as it will appear on "
|
||
"your transfer orders and other warehouse documents. It might be smart to use"
|
||
" an understandable one (e.g.: WH/[first letters of location])."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"需要注意的是 **简称** 非常重要, 它会出现在调拨单以及其他仓库单据, 定义的时候需要足够简单并且易于理解(例如 :WH/[位置的首字母])。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you go back to your dashboard, new operations will automatically have "
|
||
"been generated for your new warehouse."
|
||
msgstr "如果你回到仪表盘, 新的仓库会自动的生成作业类型。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:53
|
||
msgid "Creating a new inventory"
|
||
msgstr "创建一个新的库存"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:55
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you create a new warehouse you might already have an existing physical "
|
||
"inventory in it. In that case you should create an inventory in Odoo, if not"
|
||
" you can skip this step."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果你创建了一个新的仓库, 你可能在此之前已经有一些实际的库存。这样的话你就需在Odoo中创建一个盘点。如果没有库存的话, 就可以跳过该步骤。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go into the inventory application, select :menuselection:`Inventory Control "
|
||
"--> Inventory Adjustment`. You can then create a new inventory by clicking "
|
||
"on **Create**. Fill in the **Inventory Reference**, **Date** and be sure to "
|
||
"select the right warehouse and location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"进入库存管理应用模块, 选择 :menuselection:`库存控制-->库存调整` 。通过点击 **创建** 创建新的盘点。在 **盘点参照** ,"
|
||
" **日期** 中输入内容并确保选择正确的仓库和库位。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Next, click on **Start Inventory**. A new window will open where you will be"
|
||
" able to input your existing products. Select add an item and indicate the "
|
||
"**Real Quantity** available in the warehouse. The theoretical quantity can "
|
||
"not be changed as it represents a computed quantity from purchase and sales "
|
||
"orders."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"接下啦, 点击 **开始盘点** 。会弹出一个你可以输入当前产品的窗口。选择添加新的条目并确认仓库中的 **实际数量** 。理论数量不能更改, "
|
||
"因为它代表着采购和销售相关的计算数量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Don't forget to validate your inventory once you have recorder the state of "
|
||
"all yours product."
|
||
msgstr "一旦记录了所有的产品, 不要忘了校验你的库存。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:80
|
||
msgid "Create an internal transfer"
|
||
msgstr "创建内部调拨"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:82
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The final step is to create your internal transfer. If you want to tranfer 2"
|
||
" units of a product from your first warehouse to another one in Brussels, "
|
||
"proceed as follows:"
|
||
msgstr "最后一步就是创建内部调拨。如果你想把2片产品从第一个产品呢转移到布鲁塞尔的另外一个仓库, 可以按照以下步骤 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:86
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"From your dashboard, select a internal movement of one of the two "
|
||
"warehouses. To do so, click on :menuselection:`More --> Transfer`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在仪表盘上, 选择两个仓库中的其中一个内部调拨。要这样做, 点击菜单 :menuselection:`调拨(More) --> "
|
||
"转移(Transfer)` 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A new window will open where you will be able to select the source location "
|
||
"zone (in this case our \"old warehouse\") and the destination location zone "
|
||
"(in this case our \"new\" warehouse located in Brussels)."
|
||
msgstr "一个新的窗口会打开, 在这里你可以选择源库位区域(这里是 **旧的仓库** )和目标区域(在这里是位于布鲁塞尔的 **新** 仓库)。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:96
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Add the products you want to transfer by clicking on **Add an Item** and "
|
||
"don't forget to **Validate** or **Mark as TODO** once you are done."
|
||
msgstr "通过点击 **添加新的条目** 添加想要调拨的产品, 做完之后不要忘了 **确认** 或者 **标记为待做** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:102
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you select **Validate**, Odoo will process all quantities to transfer."
|
||
msgstr "如果你选择了 **确认** , Odoo会处理待调拨的全部数量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:104
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you select **Mark as TODO**, Odoo will put the transfer in **Waiting "
|
||
"Availability** status. Click on **Reserve** to reserve the amount of "
|
||
"products in your source warehouse."
|
||
msgstr "如果你选择了 **标记为代办** , Odoo会把调拨单转换为 **等待可用** 状态。点击 **保留** 来保留源仓库中需要保留的数量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:108
|
||
msgid "It is also possible to manually transfer each product:"
|
||
msgstr "也有可能人工调拨每一个产品 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:110
|
||
msgid "Via your dashboard, select the transfer order in the source location."
|
||
msgstr "通过仪表盘在源库位中选择调拨单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:115
|
||
msgid "Select the right transfer order"
|
||
msgstr "选择正确的调拨单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:120
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"3. Click on the little pencil logo in the lower right corner in order to "
|
||
"open the operation details window. In this new window you can manually "
|
||
"indicate how much products you process"
|
||
msgstr "3.在右下角铅笔的图标上点击打开详细操作窗口。在新的窗口中你可以手工的输入你想处理的产品数量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:129
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you decide to partially process the transfer order (e.g. a part of the "
|
||
"products can't be shipped yet due to an unexpected event), Odoo will "
|
||
"automatically ask if you wish to create a **backorder**. Create a backorder "
|
||
"if you expect to process the remaining products later, do not create a "
|
||
"backorder if you will not supply/receive the remaining products."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果你决定部分的完成调拨单(例如因为未知事件造成了部分产品不能发货), Odoo会自动的问你是否需要创建一个 **未完成单子** "
|
||
"。如果你想稍后完成剩下部分就创建一个未完成单子, 如果不打算稍后进一步操作就不创建未完成订单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is a procurement rule?"
|
||
msgstr "什么是补货规则?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The procurement inventory control system begins with a customer's order. "
|
||
"With this strategy, companies only make enough product to fulfill customer's"
|
||
" orders. One advantage to the system is that there will be no excess of "
|
||
"inventory that needs to be stored, thus reducing inventory levels and the "
|
||
"cost of carrying and storing goods. However, one major disadvantage to the "
|
||
"pull system is that it is highly possible to run into ordering dilemmas, "
|
||
"such as a supplier not being able to get a shipment out on time. This leaves"
|
||
" the company unable to fulfill the order and contributes to customer "
|
||
"dissatisfaction."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"补货库存控制系统始于一个客户订单。在该策略下, 公司只需要满足客户订单数量的产品即可。系统的一个先进性就是不会存放多余需求数量的产品, "
|
||
"这样就减少了库存水平和存储成本。然而拉系统的一个缺点是在这种状况下极有可能遇到订单的困境, 例如供应商不能及时的发货。这就让功能不能让公司顺利完成订单,"
|
||
" 并增加客户对公司的不满。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"An example of a pull inventory control system is the make-to-order. The goal"
|
||
" is to keep inventory levels to a minimum by only having enough inventory, "
|
||
"not more or less, to meet customer demand. The MTO system eliminates waste "
|
||
"by reducing the amount of storage space needed for inventory and the costs "
|
||
"of storing goods."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"一个拉式库存控制系统的例子是MTO。目的是是库存水平保持在之满足需求的最低水平, 不多也不少, "
|
||
"恰好满足客户的需求。MTO系统通过减少存储空间、储存成本的总量消除浪费。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Procurement rules are part of the routes. Go to the Inventory "
|
||
"application>Configuration>Settings and tick \"Advance routing of products "
|
||
"using rules\"."
|
||
msgstr "补货规则是路线的一部分。进入库存应用>配置>设置, 点击\" 产品高级路线,使用规则\"。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:35
|
||
msgid "Procurement rules settings"
|
||
msgstr "补货规则设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The procurement rules are set on the routes. In the inventory application, "
|
||
"go to Configuration > Routes."
|
||
msgstr "补货规则设置在路线上。在库存应用, 进入配置>路径"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:40
|
||
msgid "In the Procurement rules section, click on Add an item."
|
||
msgstr "在补货规则部分, 点击添加项目。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Here you can set the conditions of your rule. There are 3 types of action "
|
||
"possible :"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:48
|
||
msgid "Move from another location rules"
|
||
msgstr "从其他位置移动规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:53
|
||
msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Manufacturing application has to be installed in order to trigger "
|
||
"manufacturing rules."
|
||
msgstr "制造应用必须安装,用来触发制造规则。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The Purchase application has to be installed in order to trigger **buy** "
|
||
"rules."
|
||
msgstr "采购应用必须安装,用来触发 **购买** 规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:68
|
||
msgid "Try to create a procurement rule in our demo instance."
|
||
msgstr "试着在demo实例创建一个补货规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:71
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Some Warehouse Configuration creates routes with procurement rules already "
|
||
"defined."
|
||
msgstr "一些仓库配置会使用早已定义的补货规则创建路线。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:75
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:130
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:152
|
||
msgid ":doc:`push_rule`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`push_rule` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:76
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:84
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:153
|
||
msgid ":doc:`inter_warehouse`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`inter_warehouse` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:85
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:154
|
||
msgid ":doc:`cross_dock`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`cross_dock` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is a push rule?"
|
||
msgstr "什么是推式规则?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The push system of inventory control involves forecasting inventory needs to"
|
||
" meet customer demand. Companies must predict which products customers will "
|
||
"purchase along with determining what quantity of goods will be purchased. "
|
||
"The company will in turn produce enough product to meet the forecast demand "
|
||
"and sell, or push, the goods to the consumer. Disadvantages of the push "
|
||
"inventory control system are that forecasts are often inaccurate as sales "
|
||
"can be unpredictable and vary from one year to the next. Another problem "
|
||
"with push inventory control systems is that if too much product is left in "
|
||
"inventory, this increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An "
|
||
"advantage to the push system is that the company is fairly assured it will "
|
||
"have enough product on hand to complete customer orders, preventing the "
|
||
"inability to meet customer demand for the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A push flow indicates how locations are chained with the other ones. As soon"
|
||
" as a given quantity of products is moved in the source location, a chained "
|
||
"move is automatically foreseen according to the parameters set on the flow "
|
||
"specification (destination location, delay, type of move, journal). It can "
|
||
"be triggered automatically or manually."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"一个推流程指示库位如何与其他的库位链接起来。只要在源库位中给定数量的产品发生移动, 通过在流程说明中配置的参数一个链式移动会自动的生成(目标库位, "
|
||
"延迟, 移动类型, 分类账)。它可以自动的触发或者手动处理。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Push rules are part of the routes. Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory "
|
||
"--> Configuration --> Settings` and tick **Advance routing of products using"
|
||
" rules**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"推规则是路线的构成, 进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->配置(Configuration) --> "
|
||
"设置(Settings)` 并勾选 **产品使用高级路径规则** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:39
|
||
msgid "Push rules settings"
|
||
msgstr "推式规则设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The push rules are set on the routes. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration "
|
||
"--> Routes`."
|
||
msgstr "在路径上设置推规则。进入菜单 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->路径(Routes)` 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:44
|
||
msgid "In the push rule section, click on **Add an item**."
|
||
msgstr "在推规则部分, 点击 **添加一个新项目** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:49
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Here you can set the conditions of your rule. In this example, when a good "
|
||
"is in **Input location**, it needs to be moved to the quality control. In "
|
||
"the 3 steps receipts, another push rule will make the goods that are in the "
|
||
"quality control location move to the stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在这里你可以设置规则的条件。在该示例中, 当货物在 **收货区域** 时候, 需要被移动到质检区域, 在3步收货流程中, "
|
||
"会有另外一个推规则把货物从质检区域移动到库存中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:59
|
||
msgid "Try to create a push rule in our demo instance."
|
||
msgstr "在demo实例创建一个推式规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Some warehouse configuration creates routes with push rules already defined."
|
||
msgstr "有些仓库用已经定义好的推规则创建路线。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:66
|
||
msgid "Stock transfers"
|
||
msgstr "库存调拨"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The push rule will trigger stock transfer. According to the rule set on your"
|
||
" route, you will see that some transfers might be ready and other are "
|
||
"waiting."
|
||
msgstr "推规则会触发库存转移。通过路径中设置的规则, 你会看到有些转移已经已经就绪并且在等待中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:72
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The push rule that was set above will create moves from **WH/Input** "
|
||
"location to the **WH/Quality Control** location."
|
||
msgstr "以上设置的推规则会创建一个从 **库存/收货区域** 到 **库存/质检** 区域的一个调拨。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:78
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In this example, another move is waiting according to the second push rule, "
|
||
"it defines that when the quality control is done, the goods will be moved to"
|
||
" the main stock."
|
||
msgstr "在该示例中, 另外一个调拨在等待第二个调拨, 它的逻辑是当质检过程的调拨完成后, 产品就会移动到主要库存中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:83
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:128
|
||
msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`procurement_rule` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the "
|
||
"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, "
|
||
"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure"
|
||
" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set"
|
||
" those virtual warehouses."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8
|
||
msgid "Set up virtual warehouses"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new"
|
||
" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock "
|
||
"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the "
|
||
"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on "
|
||
"create."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, "
|
||
"because you will need it later in the process."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and "
|
||
"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A"
|
||
" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two "
|
||
"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse"
|
||
" A+B."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24
|
||
msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in"
|
||
" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. "
|
||
"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping "
|
||
"information."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery"
|
||
" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse"
|
||
" A and one in warehouse B."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to use routes?"
|
||
msgstr "如何使用路径?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A route is a collection of procurement rules and push rules. Odoo can manage"
|
||
" advanced push/pull routes configuration, for example:"
|
||
msgstr "路线就是推规则和拉规则的合并整理。Odoo可以配置高级推/拉路线的配置, 例如 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:11
|
||
msgid "Manage product manufacturing chains"
|
||
msgstr "管理产品的制造链条"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Manage default locations per product"
|
||
msgstr "为每个产品管理默认位置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Define routes within your warehouse according to business needs, such as "
|
||
"quality control, after sales services or supplier returns"
|
||
msgstr "根据业务需求在仓库中定义路线, 例如质检, 售后和供应商退货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Help rental management, by generating automated return moves for rented "
|
||
"products"
|
||
msgstr "租用管理协助是从租借产品自动生成退回移动"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Procurement rules are part of the routes. Go to the **Inventory** "
|
||
"application, :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and tick **Advance "
|
||
"routing of products using rules**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"拉规则是路线的一部分, 进入 **库存** 应用中 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` 并勾选 **产品的高级路径规则** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:32
|
||
msgid "Pre-configured routes"
|
||
msgstr "预配置的路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Odoo has some pre-configured routes for your warehouses."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo已经在仓库模块中预配置了些路线。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the Inventory application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Warehouses`."
|
||
msgstr "在仓库模块中, 点击 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->仓库(Warehouses)` 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, **Incoming Shipments** and "
|
||
"**Outgoing Shippings** options set some routes according to your choices."
|
||
msgstr "在 **仓库配置** 页面, **入库** 和 **出库** 的选项会根据你的选择而创建响应的路线。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:46
|
||
msgid "Custom Routes"
|
||
msgstr "定制路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:48
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Routes`."
|
||
msgstr "在仓库模块中, 进入 :menuselection:`配置 -->路径` 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you have to select the places where this route can be selected. You "
|
||
"can combine several choices."
|
||
msgstr "首先, 需要选择该路径能被选择的地方, 也可以组合不同地方。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Routes applied on warehouses"
|
||
msgstr "应用在仓库的路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:60
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you tick **Warehouses**, you have to choose on which warehouse it will be"
|
||
" applied. The route will be set for all transfer in that warehouse that "
|
||
"would meet the conditions of the procurement and push rules."
|
||
msgstr "如果在路线中勾选了 **仓库** , 就需要设置该路径适用于哪个仓库。该路线可以被设置在该仓库中的所有满足路线中推拉规则的调拨中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:68
|
||
msgid "Routes applied on products"
|
||
msgstr "应用在产品的路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you tick **Products**, you have to manually set on which product it will "
|
||
"be applied."
|
||
msgstr "如果选择了 **产品** , 你就可以在产品上设置路径"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Open the product on which you want to apply the routes "
|
||
"(:menuselection:`Inventory --> Control --> Products`). In the Inventory Tab,"
|
||
" select the route(s):"
|
||
msgstr "打开想要设置该路线的产品( :menuselection:`库存 -->控制 -->产品` ). 在库存页面中, 选择路线(可以多选) :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:84
|
||
msgid "Routes applied on Product Category"
|
||
msgstr "应用在产品类别的路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:86
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you tick **Product Categories**, you have to manually set on which "
|
||
"categories it will be applied."
|
||
msgstr "如果你勾选了 **产品类别** , 你需要手工的设置该产品属于那个种类。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Open the product on which you want to apply the routes "
|
||
"(:menuselection:`Configuration --> Product Categories`). Select the route(s)"
|
||
" under the **Logistics** section :"
|
||
msgstr "打开想要设置该路线的产品( :menuselection:`配置 -->产品类别` ).在 **物流** 部分选择路径(可以多选) :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:100
|
||
msgid "Routes applied on Sales Order lines"
|
||
msgstr "应用在销售订单行的路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:102
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you tick **Sales order lines**, you have to manually set the route every "
|
||
"time you make a sale order."
|
||
msgstr "如果勾选了 **销售订单行** , 你就可以每次创建小受受订单的时候手工的设置路径。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:108
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to make it work, you also have to activate the use of the routes on"
|
||
" the sales order."
|
||
msgstr "为了能正常使用, 我们需要激活销售订单上的路径这一功能。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:111
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the Sales application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` "
|
||
"and tick **Choose specific routes on sales order lines (advanced)**."
|
||
msgstr "在销售模块, 进入 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` 并勾选 **在销售订单选择特定的路线(高级)** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:118
|
||
msgid "You can now choose the routes for each lines of your sales orders:"
|
||
msgstr "现在可以给销售订单的每条订单行选择路径 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:124
|
||
msgid "Procurement and push rules"
|
||
msgstr "补货规则和推式规则"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:126
|
||
msgid "Please refer to the documents:"
|
||
msgstr "请参照文档"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:133
|
||
msgid "Procurement configuration"
|
||
msgstr "补货配置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:135
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When doing a procurement request, you can force the route you want to use. "
|
||
"On the product (:menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`), click on "
|
||
"**Procurement Request**. Choose the route you want to use next to "
|
||
"**Preferred Routes**:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在进行补货时, 你可以强制使用想要使用的路线。在产品( :menuselection:`库存控制 -->产品` ), 点击 **补货需求** 。在 "
|
||
"**优先路线** 旁边选择想要使用的路径。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:144
|
||
msgid "Make-to-Order Route"
|
||
msgstr "按订单补货路线"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:146
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you work with no stock, or with minimum stock rules, it is better to use "
|
||
"the **Make To Order** route. Combine it with the route **Buy** or "
|
||
"**Manufacture** and it will trigger automatically the purchase order or the "
|
||
"Manufacturing Order when your products are out-of-stock."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果想要无库存, 或者保持最低库存, 最好使用 **按订单补货** 的路径。然后和 **买** 或者 **生产** 的路径结合, "
|
||
"之后系统就会根据路径设置在没有库存的时候自动触发采购订单或者生产订单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Product Costing"
|
||
msgstr "产品成本"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:3
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"How to integrate additional costs in the cost of the product? (landed costs)"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The landed cost feature in Odoo allows to include additional costs "
|
||
"(shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Landed costs can only be applied to products with a FIFO costing method and "
|
||
"an automated inventory valuation (which requires the accounting application "
|
||
"to be installed)."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"First, you need to activate the landed costs feature in "
|
||
":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:27
|
||
msgid "Add costs to products"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs` and click "
|
||
"on the **Create** button. You then have to select the transfers on which you"
|
||
" want to attribute additional costs and the costs lines you want to add up. "
|
||
"Once it's done, click on the **Compute** button to see how the costs lines "
|
||
"will be split accross your transfers lines."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:38
|
||
msgid "To confirm, click on the **Validate** button."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies"
|
||
msgstr "上架和下架策略"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move "
|
||
"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo"
|
||
" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of"
|
||
" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into "
|
||
"the most appropriate location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important "
|
||
"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other "
|
||
"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules "
|
||
"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the "
|
||
"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be "
|
||
"automatically activated."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18
|
||
msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have"
|
||
" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-"
|
||
"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the "
|
||
"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on "
|
||
"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the "
|
||
"product will enter before being redirected to the right location."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped "
|
||
"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, "
|
||
"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory "
|
||
"Report*, under the reporting menu."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3
|
||
msgid "What is a removal strategy (FIFO, LIFO, and FEFO)?"
|
||
msgstr "何为下架策略 (FIFO, LIFO, 及 FEFO)?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Removal strategies are usually in picking operations to select the best "
|
||
"products in order to optimize the distance for the worker, for quality "
|
||
"control purpose or due to reason of product expiration."
|
||
msgstr "下架策略在拣货过程中很有用, 在拣货员对产品拣货的时候优化距离, 质检或者到期产品管理等都非常有用。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When a product movement needs to be done, Odoo will find available products "
|
||
"that can be assigned to shipping. The way Odoo assign these products depend "
|
||
"on the **removal strategy** that is defined on the **product category** or "
|
||
"on the **location**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"当产品的移动需要被完成的时候, Odoo会在系统内部找到该调拨单上的要求数量的可用数量。Odoo会根据设置在 **产品类别** 或者 **产品** 上的"
|
||
" **下架策略** 分配产品到该调拨单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings`:"
|
||
msgstr "在 **库存** 应用中, 进入 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Check **Track lots or serial numbers**, **Manage several location per "
|
||
"warehouse** and **Advanced routing of products using rules**, then click on "
|
||
"**Apply**."
|
||
msgstr "勾选 **追踪批次号还活着序列号** , **仓库进行多库位管理** 和 **产品的高级路线管理** , 然后点击 **应用** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:33
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Locations` and open the "
|
||
"location on which you want to apply a removal strategy."
|
||
msgstr "然后, 打开 :`配置 -->库位` 并打开需要设置出库策略的库位。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:40
|
||
msgid "Types of removal strategy"
|
||
msgstr "下架策略的类型"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:43
|
||
msgid "FIFO ( First In First Out )"
|
||
msgstr "FIFO (先进先出)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:45
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"A **First In First Out** strategy implies that the products that were "
|
||
"stocked first will move out first. Companies should use FIFO method if they "
|
||
"are selling perishable goods. Companies selling products with relatively "
|
||
"short demand cycles, such as clothes, also may have to pick FIFO to ensure "
|
||
"they are not stuck with outdated styles in inventory."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
" **先进先出** 策略意味着先进来的产品会先出库。如果有销售易变质的产品, 就应该使用FIFO的方法。如果公司销售周期性相对短的产品, 例如服装, "
|
||
"那么也最好使用FIFO, 这样不至于在库存中囤积大量的过时产品。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:51
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, open the "
|
||
"stock location and set **FIFO** removal strategy."
|
||
msgstr "进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->库位` , 打开库存库位并设置 **先进先出** 的出库策略。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:54
|
||
msgid "Let's take one example of FIFO removal strategy."
|
||
msgstr "我们举个先进先出下架策略的例子"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:56
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In your warehouse stock (``WH/Stock``) location, there are ``3`` lots of "
|
||
"``iPod 32 Gb`` available."
|
||
msgstr "在你的仓库库存(\" 仓库/库存 \\ \")库位中,\" iPod 32 Gb \\ \"的产品有\" 3 \\ \"个批次。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can find details of available inventory in inventory valuation report."
|
||
msgstr "可以在存货计价报表中看到可用存货的详细信息"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Create one sales order ``25`` unit of ``iPod 32 GB`` and confirm it."
|
||
msgstr "创建一个数量为\" 25 \\ \"的\" iPod 32 GB \\ \"销售订单并确认该订单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can see in the outgoing shipment product that the ``Ipod 32 Gb`` are "
|
||
"assigned with the **oldest** lots, using the FIFO removal strategy."
|
||
msgstr "在出货单中你可以看到在使用先进先出的出库策略下系统自动带出的\" Ipod 32 Gb \\ \"的批次是 **最旧** 的批次号。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:75
|
||
msgid "LIFO (Last In First Out)"
|
||
msgstr "LIFO (后进先出)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:77
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In this warehouse management, the products which are brought in the last, "
|
||
"moves out the first. LIFO is used in case of products which do not have a "
|
||
"shelf life."
|
||
msgstr "在这种仓库管理中, 最后买进的产品最先出库。后进先出用在后买进的产品没有足够的空间或者货架存放的状况下。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:81
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, open the "
|
||
"stock location and set **LIFO** removal strategy."
|
||
msgstr "进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->库位` , 打开库存库位并设置 **先进先出** 的出库策略。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:84
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In our example, let's check the current available stock of ``Ipod 32 Gb`` on"
|
||
" ``WH/Stock`` location."
|
||
msgstr "在我们的示例中, 让我们来检查一下\" WH/Stock \\ \"库位中的 `Ipod 32 Gb\" 可用库存。 "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:90
|
||
msgid "Create a sale order with ``10`` units of ``Ipod 32 Gb``."
|
||
msgstr "创建一个数量是\" 10 \\ \"的\" Ipod 32 Gb \\ \"的销售订单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can see in the outgoing shipment product that the ``Ipod 32 Gb`` are "
|
||
"assigned with the **newest** lots, using the LIFO removal strategy."
|
||
msgstr "在出库单中你可以看到在使用后进先出的出库策略的状况下\" Ipod 32 Gb \\ \"被分配的批次号是 **最新的** 批次号。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:100
|
||
msgid "FEFO ( First Expiry First Out )"
|
||
msgstr "FEFO (到期先出)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:102
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In FEFO warehouse management, the products are dispatched from the warehouse"
|
||
" according to their expiration date."
|
||
msgstr "在先到期先处的仓库管理中, 系统会根据产品的到期日期的先后顺序分发产品。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:105
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Setting`. Check the "
|
||
"option **Define Expiration date on serial numbers**. Then click on **Apply**"
|
||
" to save changes."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"进入 :menuselection:`库存-->配置 -->设置` 。勾选 **在序列号上定义到期日期** 。然后点击 **应用** 保存变更。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:112
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"This will allow you to set four expiration fields for each lot or serial "
|
||
"number: **best before date**, **end of life date**, **alert date** and "
|
||
"**removal date**. These dates can be set from :menuselection:`Inventory "
|
||
"Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"这将允许您为每批货物或序列号设置4个过期字段:**最佳日期**, **失效日期**, **警示日期** 以及 **撤柜日期**。这些日期可从以下路径设置"
|
||
" :menuselection:`库存->控制->序列号/批次。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:119
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Best Before Date**: This is the date on which the goods with this "
|
||
"serial/lot number start deteriorating, without being dangerous yet."
|
||
msgstr "**最佳日期**:本序列/批次货物自此日期起变质,但尚未造成危害。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:122
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**End of Life Date:** This is the date on which the goods with this "
|
||
"serial/lot number may become dangerous and must not be consumed."
|
||
msgstr "**失效日期:**:本序列/批次货物自此日期起变质,不得消费。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:125
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Removal Date:** This is the date on which the goods with this serial/lot "
|
||
"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategy "
|
||
"goods are picked for delivery orders using this date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:129
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"**Alert Date:** This is the date on which an alert should be sent about the "
|
||
"goods with this serial/lot number."
|
||
msgstr "**警示日期:**本序列/批次货物被发出警示的日期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:132
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Lots will be picked based on their **removal date**, from earliest to "
|
||
"latest. Lots without a removal date defined will be picked after lots with "
|
||
"removal dates."
|
||
msgstr "根据**撤柜日期**按照货物的时间顺序分批撤下。先处理定义了撤柜日期的货物,再处理未定义此日期的批次。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:136
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"All dates except **removal date** are for informational and reporting "
|
||
"purposes only. Lots that are past any or all of the above expiration dates "
|
||
"may still be picked for delivery orders, and no alerts will be sent when "
|
||
"lots pass their **alert date**."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"除**撤柜日期**外的所有数据都只用于参考和汇报。超出上述所有日期期限的批次可能仍会作为送货订单拣出,且当这批次货物超过**警示日期**后并不会发出警示。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:140
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Expiration dates on lots can also be set automatically when goods are "
|
||
"received into stock. After enabling expiration dates on serial numbers, four"
|
||
" new fields will become available in the inventory tab of the product form: "
|
||
"**product life time**, **product use time**, **product removal time**, and "
|
||
"**product alert time**. When an integer is entered into one of these fields,"
|
||
" the expiration date of a lot/serial of the product in question will be set "
|
||
"to the creation date of the lot/serial number plus the number of days "
|
||
"entered in the time increment field. If the time increment field is set to "
|
||
"zero, then the expiration date of a lot/serial must be defined manually "
|
||
"after the lot has been created."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"批次货物的过期日期也可在货物入库时自动设置。根据序列号启用过期日期后,产品详情表的库存页签下会出现4个新的字段:**产品生命周期**、**产品使用寿命**、**产品撤柜时间**和**产品警示时间**。当其中一个字段输入整数后,对应产品的批次/序列的过期日期将被设为该批次/序列的创建日期加上在时间增量字段中输入的天数。如果时间增量字段设为0,则该批次/序列的过期日期必须在该批次创建之后手动设置。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:149
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Each of these time increment fields is used to generate one of the lot "
|
||
"expiration date fields as follows:"
|
||
msgstr "每个时间增量字段都用于生成以下一种过期日期字段,如下所示:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:151
|
||
msgid "Product Use Time --> Best Before Date"
|
||
msgstr "产品使用寿命->最好在此日期前使用"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:153
|
||
msgid "Product Removal Time --> Removal Date"
|
||
msgstr "产品撤柜时间->撤柜日期"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:155
|
||
msgid "Product Life Time --> End of Life Date"
|
||
msgstr "产品生命周期->生命周期结束"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:157
|
||
msgid "Product Alert Time --> Alert Date"
|
||
msgstr "产品警示时间->警示日期"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:159
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To set the removal strategy on location, go to :menuselection:`Configuration"
|
||
" --> Locations` and choose FEFO."
|
||
msgstr "要在库位上设置出库策略, 进入 :`配置 -->库位` 并选择FEFO。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:165
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Let's take an example, there are ``3`` lots of ``ice cream`` available in "
|
||
"``WH/Stock`` location: ``LOT0001``, ``LOT0002``, ``LOT0003`` with different "
|
||
"expiration date."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"让我们举个例子, 在\" WH/Stock \\ \"库位中有\" 3 \\ \"个批次的\" 冰淇淋 \\ \":\" LOT0001 \\ "
|
||
"\",\" LOT0002 \\ \",\" LOT0003 \\ \", 分别标有不同的到期日期。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:170
|
||
msgid "**Lot / Serial No**"
|
||
msgstr " **批次 / 序列号** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:170
|
||
msgid "**Product**"
|
||
msgstr " **产品** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:170
|
||
msgid "**Expiration Date**"
|
||
msgstr " **到期日期** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:172
|
||
msgid "LOT0001"
|
||
msgstr "LOT0001"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:172
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:174
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:176
|
||
msgid "Ice Cream"
|
||
msgstr "冰淇淋"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:172
|
||
msgid "08/20/2015"
|
||
msgstr "2015-08-20"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:174
|
||
msgid "LOT0002"
|
||
msgstr "LOT0002"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:174
|
||
msgid "08/10/2015"
|
||
msgstr "2015-08-10"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:176
|
||
msgid "LOT0003"
|
||
msgstr "LOT0003"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:176
|
||
msgid "08/15/2015"
|
||
msgstr "2015-08-15"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:179
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"We will create a sale order with ``15kg`` of ``ice cream`` and confirm it."
|
||
msgstr "我们将创建一个带有\" 15kg \\ \"的\" 冰淇淋 \\ \"的销售订单并确认。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:181
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The outgoing shipment related to sale order will make the move based on "
|
||
"removal strategy **FEFO**."
|
||
msgstr "销售订单相关的发货单将会根据 **FEFO** 的出库策略进行调拨。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:184
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It will take ``10kg`` from ``LOT0002`` and ``5kg`` from ``LOT0003`` based on"
|
||
" the removal dates."
|
||
msgstr "它会根据批次上的移除日期从批次\" LOT0002 \\ \"拿出\" 10kg `, 从 \\ \"LOT0003\" 拿出 \\ \"5kg\" 。 "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:192
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:193
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Shipping"
|
||
msgstr "送货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Shipping Operations"
|
||
msgstr "发货作业"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request to a shipper?"
|
||
msgstr "如何取消发给货代的发货请求?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. "
|
||
"Odoo will be linked with the transportation company tracking system."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo可以处理不同交货方式, 包含第三方货代。Odoo可以和第三方货代公司的追踪系统链接。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"It will allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the "
|
||
"destination."
|
||
msgstr "这会让你能够管理货运公司, 实际价格和目的地。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:15
|
||
msgid "You can easily cancel the request made to the carrier system."
|
||
msgstr "你可以轻易的取消已经到货代系统中的货运请求。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:18
|
||
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request?"
|
||
msgstr "如何取消发货请求?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the delivery order is not **Validated**, then the request hasn't been "
|
||
"made. You can choose to cancel the delivery or to change the carrier."
|
||
msgstr "如果交货单还没有 **被确认** , 那么该请求不会生效。你可以取消该发货单或者变更货代。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you have clicked on **Validate**, the request has been made and you "
|
||
"should have received the tracking number and the label. You can still cancel"
|
||
" the request. Simply click on the **Cancel** button next to the **Carrier "
|
||
"Tracking Ref**:"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果你点击了 **确认** , 发货请求就已经生成, 你可以得到云帆好以及标签。你可以可以取消该请求, 只需要在 **货运单号** 旁边的 **取消**"
|
||
" 点击即可。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:32
|
||
msgid "You will now see that the shipment has been cancelled."
|
||
msgstr "你会看到发货已经被取消掉。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:37
|
||
msgid "You can now change the carrier if you wish."
|
||
msgstr "现在你还可以变更货代。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:40
|
||
msgid "How to send a shipping request after cancelling one?"
|
||
msgstr "如何在取消之后发送发货请求?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"After cancelling the shipping request, you can change the carrier you want "
|
||
"to use. Confirm it by clicking on the **Send to shipper** button. You will "
|
||
"get a new tracking number and a new label."
|
||
msgstr "在取消发货请求后, 你可以把货代变更为你想要的。通过点击 **发送给货代** 按钮确认。你会得到一个新的运单号以及一张新的标签。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:50
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:115
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:83
|
||
msgid ":doc:`invoicing`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`invoicing` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:51
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:116
|
||
msgid ":doc:`multipack`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`multipack` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to invoice the shipping cost to the customer?"
|
||
msgstr "如何就运费给客户开票?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:8
|
||
msgid "There are two ways to invoice the shipping costs:"
|
||
msgstr "有两种方式给运输成本开票 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:10
|
||
msgid "Agree with the customer over a cost and seal it down in the sale order"
|
||
msgstr "和客户达成一个协议成本价并在销售订单中固定下来"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:13
|
||
msgid "Invoice the real cost of the shipping."
|
||
msgstr "按照运输的实际成本发货。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:18
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure the price of your delivery methods, go to the **Inventory** "
|
||
"app, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery --> Delivery "
|
||
"Methods`."
|
||
msgstr "要给交货方式配置价格。进入 **库存** 应用, 点击 :menuselection:`配置 -->交货 -->交货方式` 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:21
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can manually set a price for the shipping: It can be fixed or based on "
|
||
"rules."
|
||
msgstr "你可以手工的给运费设置价格 :可以是固定的也可以根据相关规则。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Or you can use the transportation company computation system. Read the "
|
||
"document :doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr "或者你可以使用货运公司的计算系统。点击文档 :doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:28
|
||
msgid "How to invoice the shipping costs to the customer?"
|
||
msgstr "如何就运费成本给客户开票?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:31
|
||
msgid "Invoice the price set on the sale order"
|
||
msgstr "按销售订单上的价格开票"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:33
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:55
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On your sale order, choose the carrier that will be used. Click on "
|
||
"**Delivery Method** to choose the right one."
|
||
msgstr "在销售订单上, 选择正确的货代。点击并选择正确的 **发货方式** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:39
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:36
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The price is computed when you **save** the sale order or when you click on "
|
||
"**Set price**."
|
||
msgstr "当你点击 **保存** 销售订单或者点击 **设置价格** 的时候计算价格。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on "
|
||
"**Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a "
|
||
"product. It may vary from the real price."
|
||
msgstr "要给销售订单上的交货价格开票, 点击 **设置价格** , 它会在销售订单上添加一个交货方式名称的产品。价格和实际价格可能会不同。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you create the invoice, it will take the price set on the sale order."
|
||
msgstr "当你创建发票的时候, 发票的金额会采用订单上的金额。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:53
|
||
msgid "Invoice the real shipping costs"
|
||
msgstr "给运费的实际成本开票"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The price is computed when you **save** the sale order. Confirm the sale "
|
||
"order and proceed to deliver the product."
|
||
msgstr "价格会在你 **保存** 订单的时候计算出来。确认订单并且完成发货。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:64
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The real shipping cost is computed when the delivery order is validated, you"
|
||
" can see the real cost in the chatter of the delivery order."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:70
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go back to the sale order, the real cost is now added to the sale order."
|
||
msgstr "回到销售订单, 实际成本已经添加到销售订单中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"When you create the invoice, it will take the price computed by the carrier."
|
||
msgstr "当你创建发票的时候, 发票金额会用货代计算的金额。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:83
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you split the delivery and make several ones, each delivery order will "
|
||
"add a line to the sale order."
|
||
msgstr "如果你把发货单分开并且分成好几个, 每一个发货单给订单添加一行。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:87
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:84
|
||
msgid ":doc:`labels`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`labels` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to print shipping labels?"
|
||
msgstr "如何打印发货标签?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers "
|
||
"linked with the transportation company tracking system. It allows you to "
|
||
"manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination. And "
|
||
"finally, you will be able to print the shipping labels directly from Odoo."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"Odoo可以处理不同的交货方式, 包含与第三方的货代的追踪信息集成。它可以让你管理货运公司, 运输的实际价格和目的地。最终, "
|
||
"你可以在Odoo直接打印运单上的标签。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:18
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:17
|
||
msgid "Install the shipper company connector module"
|
||
msgstr "安装货代公司的接口模块"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:20
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Inventory** module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings`. Under **Shipping Connectors**, flag the transportation companies "
|
||
"you want to integrate :"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在 **库存** 模块, 点击 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` , 在 **货代接口** 的下方标识你想要集成的货运公司 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26
|
||
msgid "Then click on **Apply**."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **应用** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33
|
||
msgid "Configure the delivery method"
|
||
msgstr "配置发货方式"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:32
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:36
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure your delivery methods, go to the **Inventory** module, click on"
|
||
" :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery Methods`."
|
||
msgstr "要配置交货方式, 进入 **库存** 模块, 点击 :menuselection:`配置 -->交货方式` 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:35
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery methods for the chosen shippers have been automatically "
|
||
"created."
|
||
msgstr "选定货代的发货方式已经被自动创建。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:41
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the **Pricing** tab, the name of the provider means that the delivery "
|
||
"will be handled and computed by the shipper system."
|
||
msgstr "在 **价格** 页面, 货代供应商的名称意味着该发货单会被货代的系统处理和计算。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:44
|
||
msgid "The configuration of the shipper is split into two columns :"
|
||
msgstr "货代的配置被分成两栏 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first one is linked to **your account** (develop key, password,...). For"
|
||
" more information, please refer to the provider website."
|
||
msgstr "第一个和 **你的账户** 链接(开发关键字, 密码, ……)。更多信息请参见货运供应商的网站。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:49
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The second column varies according to the **provider**. You can choose the "
|
||
"packaging type, the service type, the weight unit..."
|
||
msgstr "第二栏根据 **供应者** 的不同而有所差别。你可以选择包材类型, 服务类型, 单位重量……"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:52
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Uncheck **Test Mode** when you are done with the testings."
|
||
msgstr "一旦完成测试, 就不要勾选 **测试模式** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:55
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:77
|
||
msgid "Company configuration"
|
||
msgstr "公司配置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:57
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:79
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In order to compute the right price, the provider needs your company "
|
||
"information. Be sure your address and phone number are correctly encoded."
|
||
msgstr "为了计算正确的价格, 供应商需要知道你的公司信息。确保地址和电话号码的信息都是正确的。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:64
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:86
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To check your information, go to the **Settings** application and click on "
|
||
"**General Settings**. Click on the first link **Configure your company "
|
||
"data**."
|
||
msgstr "要查看你的信息, 进入 **设置** 应用并点选 **通用设置** 。点击第一个链接 **配置公司信息** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The shipper companies need the weight of your product, otherwise the price "
|
||
"computation cannot be done."
|
||
msgstr "货代公司需要产品的重量, 不然运输价格不能计算。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:73
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go the **Sales** module, click on :menuselection:`Sales --> Products`. Open "
|
||
"the products you want to ship and set a weight on it."
|
||
msgstr "进入 **销售** 模块, 点击 :menuselection:`销售 -->产品` 。打开需要发货的产品并维护重量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:80
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The weight on the product form is expressed in kilograms. Don't forget to do"
|
||
" the conversion if you are used to the imperial measurement system."
|
||
msgstr "产品页面上的重量的默认计量单位是千克。如果使用英制计量单位的话, 不要忘了单位之间的转换。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:85
|
||
msgid "How to print shipping labels ?"
|
||
msgstr "如何打印发货标签?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:87
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery order created from the sale order will take the shipping "
|
||
"information from it, but you can change the carrier if you want to."
|
||
msgstr "从销售订单创建的发货单会从销售订单带出发货信息, 但是如果你需要的话, 你可以变更货代。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:90
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:135
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you create a delivery transfer from the inventory module, you can add the"
|
||
" third party shipper in the additional info tab."
|
||
msgstr "如果你在库存模块下创建一个发货转移, 你可以在额外的信息页签中添加第三方货代信息。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:96
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Click on **Validate** to receive the tracking number and **the label(s)**."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **验证** 接收追踪号码和 **标签** ."
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:98
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:151
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The label to stick on your package is available in the history underneath :"
|
||
msgstr "黏贴在包裹上的标签可以在下方的历史信息中找到 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:104
|
||
msgid "Click on it to open the document and print it :"
|
||
msgstr "点击打开单据并打印 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:110
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you are doing multi-packages shippings, most of the time, there will be "
|
||
"one label per package. Each label will appear in the delivery history."
|
||
msgstr "如果你在使用多包裹发货功能, 大多数情况下, 每一个包裹一个标签。每张标签都可以显示在交货历史中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to manage multiple packs for the same delivery order?"
|
||
msgstr "如何管理同一张交货单的多个包裹?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"By default, Odoo considers that your delivery is composed of one package. "
|
||
"But you can easily ship your deliveries with more than one package. It is "
|
||
"fully integrated with the third-party shippers."
|
||
msgstr "默认状况下, Odoo会认为发货单只有一个包裹构成, 但是你可以在一张发货单上配置多个包裹。它和第三方货运公司完全集成起来。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"To configure the use of packages, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory "
|
||
"--> Configuration --> Settings`. Locate the **Packages** section and tick "
|
||
"**Record packages used on packing: pallets, boxes,...**"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"要配置包裹的使用, 进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->设置` 。找到 **包裹** 的位置并选择 **在包装上记录包材 "
|
||
":栈板, 箱子, ……** "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:23
|
||
msgid "Click on **Apply** when you are done."
|
||
msgstr "一旦完成, 点击 **应用** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:29
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:77
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:110
|
||
msgid "Sale order"
|
||
msgstr "销售订单"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:34
|
||
msgid "Click on a **Delivery Method** to choose the right one."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **交货方式** 选择正确的一个。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:40
|
||
msgid "Multi-packages Delivery"
|
||
msgstr "多包裹发货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:42
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery created from the sale order will take the shipping information "
|
||
"from it."
|
||
msgstr "从销售订单创建的发货单会带出发货信息。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:48
|
||
msgid "From here, you can split your delivery into multiple packages."
|
||
msgstr "在这里, 你可以把要发的货物分成不同的包"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Choose the quantity you want to put in the first pack in the **Done** "
|
||
"column, then click on the link **Put in Pack**."
|
||
msgstr "在 **完成** 栏位选择你想要放进该包裹的产品的数量, 然后点击 **放进一个包裹** 链接。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:56
|
||
msgid "It will automatically create a pack with the requested quantity."
|
||
msgstr "它会总动的创建所需数量的包裹。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:58
|
||
msgid "Do the same steps for the other pieces you want to pack in."
|
||
msgstr "其余的产品可以按照同样的步骤进行打包。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:63
|
||
msgid "Click on **Validate** when you are done."
|
||
msgstr "一旦完成, 点击 **确认** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:66
|
||
msgid "Multi-packages with a 3rd party-shipper"
|
||
msgstr "第3方货代的多包裹"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:68
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Once the delivery order is validated, you will receive the tracking number. "
|
||
"The **carrier Tracking ref** field will automatically be filled. Click on "
|
||
"the **Tracking** button to check your delivery on the provider website."
|
||
msgstr "一旦交货单被确认后, 你就能收到追踪号。 **运单追踪号** 会被自动填好。点击货运供应商网站上的 **追踪** 按钮可以查看你的发货单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:76
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **labels** to stick on your packages are available in the history "
|
||
"underneath:"
|
||
msgstr "要黏贴在包裹上的 **标签** 可以在下面的历史信息中找到 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup.rst:3
|
||
msgid "Shipping Setup"
|
||
msgstr "发货设置"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to setup a delivery method?"
|
||
msgstr "如何设置发货方法"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, but it is not activated by "
|
||
"default. Delivery methods can be used for your sale orders, your deliveries "
|
||
"but also on your e-commerce."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo可以处理不同的交货方式, 但是该功能在默认设置下没有激活。交货方式可以用在销售订单上, 交货单上还可以用在电商中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:12
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Delivery methods allow you to manage the transport company, the price and "
|
||
"the destination. You can even integrate Odoo with external shippers to "
|
||
"compute the real price and the packagings."
|
||
msgstr "交货方式能让你管理货代供应商的公司, 价格以及目的地。你甚至还可以集成Odoo和外部的货运公司来计算实际价格和包装"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:20
|
||
msgid "Install the inventory module"
|
||
msgstr "安装库存模块"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Delivery methods are handled by the **Delivery costs** module. Go to "
|
||
"**Apps** and search for the module. You should remove the **Apps** filter in"
|
||
" order to see it :"
|
||
msgstr "交货方式是由 **发货成本** 模块处理的。进入 **APP** 并搜索该模块。s搜索的时候你需要在过滤栏位移除 **APP**: "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:30
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:29
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to integrate delivery methods in your e-commerce, you'll have to"
|
||
" install the **eCommerce Delivery** module."
|
||
msgstr "如果你想把交货方式和电商集成, 你需要安装 **电商发货** 模块。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:39
|
||
msgid "First set a name and a transporter company."
|
||
msgstr "首先设置一个名称以及一个物流公司"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:44
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Then you'll have to set the pricing. It can be fixed or based on rules."
|
||
msgstr "然后你必须要设置价格。它可以被修复或者基于规则。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the price is fixed, tick **Fixed price**. You'll just have to define the "
|
||
"price. If you want the delivery to be free above a certain amount, tick the "
|
||
"option **Free if Order total is more than** and set a price."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果价格是固定的, 点选 **固定价格** 。你只需要定义一个价格。如果你想要在在达到一定数量时免运费, 点选 **如果总量大于某一点免运费** "
|
||
"并设置一个价格。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If the price varies according to rules, tick **Based on Rules**. Click on "
|
||
"**add an item to a pricing rule**. Choose a condition based on either the "
|
||
"weight, the volume, the price or the quantity."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"如果价格根据规则不同而不同, 点选 **基于规则** 。点击 **添加一个价格规则的新条目** 。选择一个或者基于重量, 容积, 价格或者数量的条件。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:61
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Finally you can limit the delivery method to a few destinations. The limit "
|
||
"can be applied to some countries, states or even zip codes. This feature "
|
||
"limits the list of countries on your e-commerce."
|
||
msgstr "最终我们可以把发货方式局限在几个目的位置。你可以把它们限制为一些国家, 省份甚至邮编。这种特性限制了电商的国家列表。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:69
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can integrate Odoo with external shippers in order to compute the real "
|
||
"price and packagings, and handle the printing the shipping labels. See "
|
||
":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"你可以把Odoo和外部的货代公司进行集成, 这样可以计算实际的价格, 包装, 以及处理打印装箱单的标签等。参照 "
|
||
":doc:`third_party_shipper` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74
|
||
msgid "Delivery process"
|
||
msgstr "交货流程"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want "
|
||
"to invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on "
|
||
"**Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a "
|
||
"product."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"现在你吗可以在销售订单上选择 **交货方式** 。如果你想在销售订单上对运费进行开票, , 点击 **设置价格** , "
|
||
"它就会把交货方式作为一种产品名称添加到订单行上。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:88
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:130
|
||
msgid "Delivery"
|
||
msgstr "交货"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:90
|
||
msgid "You can add or change the delivery method on the delivery itself."
|
||
msgstr "你可以在发货单上添加或者变更发货方法"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"On the delivery, check the **Carrier Information**. The carrier is the "
|
||
"chosen delivery method."
|
||
msgstr "在发货单上, 查看 **货代信息** 。货代就是发货方式"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:99
|
||
msgid ":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`third_party_shipper` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:100
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:158
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../operation/invoicing` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to get DHL credentials for integration with Odoo?"
|
||
msgstr "如何得到用于集成DHL到Odoo的证书?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:5
|
||
msgid "In order to use the Odoo DHL API, you will need:"
|
||
msgstr "若您想使用 Odoo 的 DHL API接口,您需要:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:7
|
||
msgid "A DHL.com SiteID"
|
||
msgstr "DHL.com 网站账号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:9
|
||
msgid "A DHL Password"
|
||
msgstr "DHL 密码"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:11
|
||
msgid "A DHL Account Number"
|
||
msgstr "DHL 账号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:15
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Getting SiteID and password for countries other than United States (UK and "
|
||
"Rest of the world)"
|
||
msgstr "获取美国以外的国家和地区(英国和其他世界各国)的网站ID账号和密码"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:17
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You should contact DHL account manager and request integration for XML "
|
||
"Express API. The presales should provide you live credentials."
|
||
msgstr "您需要联系DHL账号管理中心请求XML格式的API扩展接口。DHL售前工程师应给您相关接口凭据等信息。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:20
|
||
msgid "Getting SiteID and Password for United States"
|
||
msgstr "获取美国网站ID账号和密码"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:22
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You need to write to xmlrequests@dhl.com along with your full Account "
|
||
"details like account number, region, address, etc. to get API Access."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"您需要写邮件至 xmlrequests@dhl.com 并且随附您账户的详细信息诸如账号, region区域, 地址, 等访问API 访问信息。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:24
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In meantime, for testing the solution, you can use the tests credentials as "
|
||
"given in the demo data:"
|
||
msgstr "同时,为了测试解决方案,您可以使用演示数据中给出的测试凭据:"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:26
|
||
msgid "**SiteID**: CustomerTest"
|
||
msgstr "**用户名**: CustomerTest"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:28
|
||
msgid "**Password**: alkd89nBV"
|
||
msgstr "**密码**: alkd89nBV"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:30
|
||
msgid "**DHL Account Number**: 803921577"
|
||
msgstr "**DHL 账号**: 803921577"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to integrate a third party shipper?"
|
||
msgstr "如何和第三方货代集成?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:8
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. "
|
||
"Odoo can be linked with the transportation company tracking system. It will "
|
||
"allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the "
|
||
"destination."
|
||
msgstr "Odoo可以处理不同的交货方式, 包含第三方货代。Odoo可以和货运公司的追踪系统链接。这会让你管理货代公司, 运输价格以及目的地。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the inventory module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> "
|
||
"Settings`. Under **Shipping Connectors**, flag the transportation companies "
|
||
"you want to integrate :"
|
||
msgstr "在库存模块, 点击 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` 。在 **货运接口** 下方, 标识出你想要集成的货代公司 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:38
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery methods for the chosen shippers have been automatically "
|
||
"created. Most of the time, there will be **2** delivery methods for the same"
|
||
" provider: one for **international** shipping and the other for **domestic**"
|
||
" shipping."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"货代供应商的交货方式已经自动创建了。大多数情况下, 一些货代供应商会有 **2** 种交货方式 :一个是 **国际运输** , 一个是 **国内运输**"
|
||
" 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:43
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can create other methods with the same provider with other "
|
||
"configuration, for example the **Packaging Type**."
|
||
msgstr "你还可以用其他配置给同一个供给创建其他方式, 例如 **包装类型** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:46
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can change the **Name** of the delivery method. This is the name that "
|
||
"will appear on your ecommerce."
|
||
msgstr "你可以更改发货方式的 **名称** 。该名称会显示在电商模块中。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:49
|
||
msgid "Flag **Shipping enabled** when you are ready to use it."
|
||
msgstr "如何准备使用的话, 就标记为 **可以发货** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:54
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"In the pricing tab, the name of the provider chosen under the **Price "
|
||
"computation** means that the pricing will be computed by the shipper system."
|
||
msgstr "在价格栏位, 选择在 **价格计算** 下面的的货代意味着价格是由货代系统计算出来的。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:57
|
||
msgid "The configuration of the shipper is split into two columns:"
|
||
msgstr "货代配置被拆分为两列 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The first one is linked to **your account** (developer key, password,...). "
|
||
"For more information, please refer to the provider website."
|
||
msgstr "第一个和 **你的账户** 链接(开发者秘钥, 密码, ……), 更多信息参照货代的网站。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:67
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Finally you can limit the delivery method to a few destinations. You can "
|
||
"limit it to some countries, states or even zip codes. This feature limits "
|
||
"the list of countries on your e-commerce. It is useful for the domestic "
|
||
"providers. For example, USPS US only delivers from the United States to the "
|
||
"United States."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"最终我们可以把发货方式局限在几个目的位置。你可以把它们限制为一些国家, 省份甚至邮编。这种特性限制了电商的国家列表。对国内的用户很有用。例如 USPS "
|
||
"US只在美国国内运输。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:95
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Go the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Open the products"
|
||
" you want to ship and set a weight on it."
|
||
msgstr "进入菜单 :menuselection:`销售 -->销售 -->产品` 。打开你想要交货的产品并为之维护重量。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:102
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The weight on the product form is expressed in kilograms. Don't forget to "
|
||
"make the conversion if you are used to the imperial measurement system."
|
||
msgstr "产品页面中的重量默认的用千克表示。如果使用英制单位, 不要忘了进行转换。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:115
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can now choose the carrier on your sale order. Click on **Delivery "
|
||
"method** to choose the right one."
|
||
msgstr "现在你可以在销售订单选择货代。点击 **发货方式** 选择正确的一个。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:118
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The price is computed when you save the sale order or when you click on "
|
||
"**Set price**."
|
||
msgstr "在你保存订单或者点击 **设置价格** 的时候价格就会计算。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:121
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you want to invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, "
|
||
"click on **Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery "
|
||
"method as a product. It may vary from the real price."
|
||
msgstr "如果你想要给销售订单的运费开票, 点击 **设置价格** , 它就会把运输方式作为一个产品名称添加到销售订单上。可能和实际价格存在差异。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:125
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Otherwise, the real price (computed when the delivery is validated) will "
|
||
"automatically be added to the invoice. For more information, please read the"
|
||
" document :doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"不然, 实际价格(发货单确认的时候会计算)会自动的添加到发票中。详情请参照文档 :doc:`../operation/invoicing` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:132
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The delivery created from the sale order will take the shipping information "
|
||
"from it. You can change the carrier if you want to."
|
||
msgstr "销售订单产生的发货单会从销售订单带出发货信息。如果有需要的话, 可以更改货代信息。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:141
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The weight is computed based on the products weights. The shipping cost will"
|
||
" be computed once the transfer is validated."
|
||
msgstr "发货重量根据产品的重量计算。一旦调拨确认后运输成本就会计算。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:144
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Click on **Validate** to receive the tracking number. The **Carrier Tracking"
|
||
" ref** field will automatically be filled. Click on the **Tracking** button "
|
||
"to check your delivery on the provider website."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **验证** 接收追踪号码。 **承运商追踪参考** 字段会被自动填上。在货代的网站上点击 **追踪** 按钮查看发货单。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:159
|
||
msgid ":doc:`../operation/labels`"
|
||
msgstr ":doc:`../operation/labels` "
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:3
|
||
msgid "How to get UPS credentials for integration with Odoo?"
|
||
msgstr "如何得到用于集成UPS的证书?"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:5
|
||
msgid "In order to use the Odoo UPS API, you will need:"
|
||
msgstr "要使用Odoo UPS API, 你需要 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:7
|
||
msgid "A UPS.com user ID and password"
|
||
msgstr "一个 UPS.com 用户 ID 和密码"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:9
|
||
msgid "A UPS account number"
|
||
msgstr "一个UPS 账户号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:11
|
||
msgid "An Access Key"
|
||
msgstr "登陆秘钥"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:13
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"An Access Key is a 16 character alpha-numeric code that allows access to the"
|
||
" UPS Developer Kit API Development and Production servers."
|
||
msgstr "访问密钥是一个16字符的字母数字代码, 允许访问的窗口开发工具包的开发和生产服务器。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:17
|
||
msgid "Create a UPS Account"
|
||
msgstr "创建一个UPS账号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:19
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"Note that only customers located in the US can open a UPS account online. If"
|
||
" you are located outside the US, you will need to contact UPS Customer "
|
||
"Service in order to to open an account."
|
||
msgstr "注意 :只有在美国本土的客户才可以在线开启UPS账户。如果你不在美国本土, 你需要和UPS客服联系取得账号"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:23
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"You can read additional information about opening a UPS account on the their"
|
||
" website, on the page, `How to Open a UPS Account Online "
|
||
"<https://www.ups.com/content/us/en/resources/sri/openaccountonline.html?srch_pos=2&srch_phr=open+ups+account>`_"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"在UPS主页你可以得到更加详细的关于如何申请UPS账号的信息 :\n"
|
||
"<https : //www.ups.com/content/us/en/resources/sri/openaccountonline.html?srch_pos=2&srch_phr=open+ups+account> `_"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:27
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you don't already have a UPS account, you can create one along with your "
|
||
"online profile by following these steps:"
|
||
msgstr "如果你还没有UPS账号, 你可以根据以下步骤创建一个在线的配置 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:30
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"1. Access the UPS.com web site at `www.ups.com <http://www.ups.com/>`__, and"
|
||
" click the **New User** link at the top of the page."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"1.用 `www.ups.com <http ://www.ups.com/>` 登入UPS.com网站并在页面上方点击 **新用户** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:34
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"2. Click the **Register for MyUPS** button, and follow the prompts to "
|
||
"complete the registration process."
|
||
msgstr "2.点击 **MyUPS注册** 按钮, 按照以下流程完成注册过程。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:37
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"If you already have a UPS account, you can add it to your online profile as "
|
||
"follows:"
|
||
msgstr "如果你已经有了UPS账号, 你可以把它添加在以下的在线配置中"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:39
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"1. Log in to the UPS.com site (`http://www.ups.com <http://www.ups.com/>`__)"
|
||
" using your UPS.com User ID and Password."
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"1.使用UPS.com的用户ID和密码登陆UPS.com网站 ( `http ://www.ups.com <http: "
|
||
"//www.ups.com/>` __)"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:43
|
||
msgid "Click the **My UPS** tab."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **My UPS** 页签。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:45
|
||
msgid "Click the **Account Summary** link."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **账户概要** 链接。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:47
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"4. Click the **Add an Existing UPS Account** link in the **UPS Account "
|
||
"Details** section of the page."
|
||
msgstr "4.在该页的 **UPS 账户详情** 部分点击 **添加现有的UPS账户** 链接。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:50
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"5. In the **Add New Account** screen, enter the **UPS Account Number**, "
|
||
"**Account Name**, and **Postal Code** fields. The country defaults to United"
|
||
" States.q"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"5. 在 **添加新的账户** 窗口, 输入 **UPS 账户号码** , **账户名称** , 以及 **邮编** 等字段, 默认的国家是美国"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:54
|
||
msgid "Click the **Next** button to continue."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **下一个** 按钮继续。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:57
|
||
msgid "Get an Access Key"
|
||
msgstr "获取访问密匙"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:59
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"After you have added your UPS account number to your user profile you can "
|
||
"request an Access Key from UPS using the steps below:"
|
||
msgstr "在添加了UPS 账户号码到你的用户属性中之后, 你将可以从UPS得到登陆秘钥 :"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:62
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"1. Go to the **UPS Developer Kit** web page "
|
||
"`https://www.ups.com/upsdeveloperkit?loc=en\\_US "
|
||
"<https://www.ups.com/upsdeveloperkit?loc=en_US>`__"
|
||
msgstr ""
|
||
"1. 到以下 **UPS 开发套件** 网页\n"
|
||
" `https://www.ups.com/upsdeveloperkit?loc=en\\_US <https://www.ups.com/upsdeveloperkit?loc=en_US>` __"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:65
|
||
msgid "Log into UPS.com with your user ID and password"
|
||
msgstr "用你的用户ID和密码登陆UPS.COM"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:67
|
||
msgid "Click on the link **Request an access key**."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **请求访问密匙** 。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:69
|
||
msgid "Verify your contact information"
|
||
msgstr "验证联系信息"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:71
|
||
msgid "Click the **Request Access Key** button."
|
||
msgstr "点击 **请求访问密匙** 按钮。"
|
||
|
||
#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:73
|
||
msgid ""
|
||
"The **Access Key** will be provided to you on the web page, and an email "
|
||
"with the Access Key will be sent to the email address of the primary "
|
||
"contact."
|
||
msgstr "你可以在登陆的网页上得到 **登陆秘钥** , 同时带有登陆秘钥的电子邮件被发送到主要联系人的邮箱中"
|